JP2019115741A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing an inequality feeling caused by skill difference among players.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine comprises: a game region to which game balls shot by shooting means are guided; a specific winning port to which game balls moving on the game region can enter; and an opening/closing member whose state can be changed between an open state in which the game balls can enter the specific winning port, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot enter the specific winning port. In a state in which the opening/closing member is in the closed state when the game balls reach a first specific point through which the game balls can enter the specific winning port if the opening/closing member is in the open state, ball entry opportunity application means guides the game balls to a second specific point through which the game balls can enter the specific winning port when the opening/closing member is in the open state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state, and the variable display device makes a lottery result In order to teach a variable display is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In general, in a pachinko machine, the so-called electronic tulip in which the gaming ball changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device called an attacker or the like is provided. Then, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  Furthermore, although such a variable ball entry device is designed to be opened based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, many open and close operations are repeated several times based on the establishment of one predetermined condition. Therefore, when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, the game ball is fired at a timing to reach the variable ball entry device, and when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, the variable ball entry device is reached. By performing a technical operation such as refraining from launching the gaming balls at such timings, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the variable ball entry device, and thus to increase the total number of gaming balls finally acquired.

JP 2003-154110 A

  However, there are players who perform such technical operations, players who do not perform such operations, or players who do not perform well, and it is not uncommon for a relatively large difference to occur in the total number of game balls finally acquired. Absent.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an unfair feeling due to a technology difference between players.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
The game ball moving in the game area is provided with ball entering means which changes state to an opened state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball can not enter the ball,
The ball entering means is
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
The ball entry detection means which detects the game ball which entered the specific winning a prize opening,
It is not possible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening, and it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening with the closed position where the ball entry means is in the closed state, and the ball entry means A shutter capable of being displaced between the open position to be in the open state;
A specific entering route for guiding a game ball moving the game area to the specific winning opening is provided,
The game ball moving in the game area is guided to the entrance of the specific entry route, whereby the game ball is guided to the entry means.
When the ball entry means is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, entry of the game ball into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter in the closed position. And the game ball is guided to the exit of the specific entry route,
When the ball entering means is in the open state when the game ball reaches the ball entering means, and in a state where the game ball is restricted from entering the specified winning opening by the shutter When the writing ball means is in the open state, the gaming ball enters the specified winning hole,
When the ball entering means is not in the open state in a state where the game ball is restricted from entering the specified winning opening by the shutter, the game ball is discharged from the exit of the specified entering route. ,
The shutter is
A first guiding portion which enters the entrance of the specific entering route and contacts the gaming ball that has reached the entering means, and guides the gaming ball away from the exit of the specific entering route;
The game ball having passed through the first guiding portion is guided, and a second guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball to the exit of the specific ball entry route,
At least a portion of the first guiding portion overlaps the second guiding portion.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress the sense of unfairness due to the technology gap between players.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows 2nd type determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing fluctuation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows common drawing distinction information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for determination etc. of a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hit display process. It is a perspective view of a 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a perspective view of a 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a sectional view of the 2nd starting winning a prize device. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame in a 2nd embodiment, a game board, etc. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd variable winning prize apparatus etc. in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus as a modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd start winning prize apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a plane schematic diagram which shows a part of 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus as a modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a sectional view showing the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is a perspective view including a partial cross section which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize device of a 4th embodiment. It is the sectional view on the AA line of FIG. 47 which shows the 2nd starting winning a prize apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd starting prize-winning apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (front side) of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view (rear surface side) of the 2nd starting winning a prize device in a 4th embodiment. As a modification of 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a top view including the partial cross section for demonstrating the upper surface shape of a shutter, (b) is sectional drawing which shows a 2nd variable winning prize apparatus etc. . It is a front view showing the 2nd variable winning a prize device etc as a modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is sectional drawing which shows 2nd variable winning a prize apparatus etc. as a modification of 2nd Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the outer frame 11 which comprises the outer shell of the said pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is supported by one side part of this outer frame 11 so that opening and closing is possible. . In FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and prizes provided on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 are omitted.

  In the outer frame 11, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the upper side frame forming portion 11a and the lower side frame forming portion 11b are formed of wooden plate members, and the left side frame forming portion 11c and the right side frame forming portion 11d are formed by extrusion of aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are made of a material, and are assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower end portions of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, an extending wall portion 83 is formed on the right side frame forming portion 11d so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening and closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening and closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 mainly includes a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly releasably supported by the outer frame 11 instead of the inner frame 12.

  Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball tray at the center of the lower portion, and the gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are the lower plate 15 It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removing lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, the left part of the lower plate 15 is provided with an effect button 125 having an LED built-in, and by pressing the effect button 125, the corresponding effect in the decorative symbol display device 42 etc. Or the content of the presentation is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball emission handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") projecting to the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is turned clockwise, the game ball is fired by the launch device 60 as launch means described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of turn operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a release prohibiting button 18 a which can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to turn the handle 18 while prohibiting the game ball from being fired, or to temporarily stop the game ball from being fired while holding the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing game balls and guiding the game balls toward a launcher 60 described later while aligning the game balls in a line. When the upper tray 19 is full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper tray 19. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a state where a bill, a card or the like is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) disposed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall etc. Loan balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a pachinko machine in which a game ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are unnecessary.

  Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removing button 123. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicated with the lower plate 15 is opened, and stored in the upper plate 19. The gaming balls are guided to the lower plate 15 (fall). That is, the player can transfer the game balls on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball release button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emission means are controlled to change the light emission mode according to the change of the game state and the like, and play a role in enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102, error indication lamps 104 are provided which are lighted at the time of a predetermined error. In the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the annular illumination part 102, a large number of fine through holes are formed corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. In the glass unit 137, a pair of conventional front and back rectangular glass plates are not separately attached in a front and back pair but are assembled in a round shape as a whole.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (the resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39, a launcher 60 and a launch rail 61 for guiding gaming balls immediately after being launched by the launcher 60 are attached. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is employed as the launcher 60. Further, a ball feeding device for guiding the gaming balls guided from the upper tray 19 above the launcher 60 to the launch position of the launcher 60 one by one by driving of a built-in drive means (e.g. solenoid) 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game board 30, the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, the first start winning device 33a, the second starting winning device 33b, the through gate 34, the variable display unit 35, the first 1 Special display device 43L, second special display device 43R, fluctuation identification lamp 40 and the like are provided. As is well known, when the game ball enters (prizes) various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning devices 32a, 32B, the start winning devices 33a, 33B, etc., they are detected by various detecting switches and the upper tray 19 or lower A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out to the plate 15.

  In the present embodiment, if there is a ball entry into the general winning opening 31, then 10 pieces, if there is a 14 ball entry into the first variable prize device 32a, 14 pieces into the second variable prize device 32b. If there is a ball, then 13 game balls. If there is a ball entry into the first start winning device 33a, 2 pieces. If there is a ball entry into the second start winning device 33b, 1 game ball. Is configured to be paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (which is discharged to the back side of the game board 30) which does not enter the ball only by passing the game ball, the payout of the game ball is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b constitutes a variable winning device, the second start winning device 33b constitutes a special starting device, and the through gate 34 constitutes a normal starting device.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and the game ball that did not win in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 etc. It is discharged through the game area. Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  A variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially in the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is disposed on the variable display unit 35 so as to surround a decorative symbol display unit 42 described later.

  A ball entry port 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and the game ball entered into the ball entry port 151 is a decorative pattern through the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game balls guided on the stage 153 roll on the stage 153 and fall from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or extend back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 to play the game balls. It falls into the lead-out groove 154 which guides to the front.

  At a lower position of the variable display unit 35, a first start winning device 33a is disposed. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front part of the gaming board 30, and on the upper side of the first starting winning device 33a is a winning opening through which the game ball can always win. In particular, the gaming ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a with relatively high probability. The first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an open / close member for changing the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. In the first variable winning device 32a, normally, the game ball is in the closed state where the game ball can not win, and in the case of the jackpot state of the corresponding type, the game ball is in the open state where the game can be won. Although not shown, the first variable winning device 32a has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a high winning shutter for opening and closing the high winning opening, and a high winning for operating the high winning shutter. The first variable winning device is provided with a solenoid for mouth and a first count switch 223a for detecting game balls entering the big winning opening, and driving control of the solenoid for big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter. 32a (big winning opening) is switched to the closed state and the open state.

  Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the area located on the left side of the variable display unit 35 in the game area is referred to as the “left side area”, and the area located on the right side of the variable display unit 35 is referred to as the “right side area”. In addition, on the downstream side of the left side area, the area located on the left side of the approximate center of the game board 30 where the first start winning device 33a and the first variable winning device 32a are arranged A region located on the right side of the substantially central portion of the game board 30 in the left / right direction on the downstream side of the right side region is referred to as a “lower right region”.

  At the lower part of the lower left area, three general winning openings 31 are disposed obliquely at predetermined intervals along the peripheral portion (inner rail forming portion 51) of the game area. Each general winning opening 31 protrudes forward from the front part of the gaming board 30, and on the upper side thereof, a winning opening through which gaming balls can always be won is opened.

  A through gate 34 is disposed in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, an entrance support lottery as to whether or not the second start winning device 33b to be described later is opened is performed in detail, and the normal symbol display device 41 is displayed. And a variable display for teaching the result of the entry support lottery. Then, when winning in the entry support lottery, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

  Furthermore, a second variable winning device 32 b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side area. In the second variable winning device 32b, normally, the game ball is in the closed state where the game ball can not win, and in the case of the jackpot state of the corresponding type, the game ball is in the open state where the game can be won. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a high winning shutter for opening and closing the high winning opening, and a high winning for operating the high winning shutter. The second variable winning device is provided with a solenoid for the mouth and a second count switch 223b for detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening, and driving control of the solenoid for the big winning opening and opening and closing the big winning shutter. 32b (big winning opening) is switched to the closed state and the open state.

  By the way, the big winning shutters of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment have the lower edge of the big winning shutter pivotally supported along the lower edge of the big winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the big winning shutter extends vertically to close the big winning opening, and the gaming ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning device 32a, 32b, the big winning shutter pivots forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), The game ball which has flowed forward is received on the back surface (upper surface) of the big winning shutter and is guided to the big winning opening.

  A second start winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 32b in the lower right region. The second start winning device 33b is also configured to be changeable between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter. The details of the second start winning device 33b will be described later.

  Although details will be described later, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b are provided with a first starting winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b, respectively, for detecting the winning game balls. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state etc. is performed, and special display devices 43L, 43R (and decorative symbol display described later) The variable display is performed by the device 42). Then, when the player wins in the lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a predetermined probability in a success lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning lottery. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the second start winning device 33b is provided with a start winning shutter 405 as an opening and closing member for opening and closing a second start winning device 33b (start winning opening 402 described later). In the mode, the start winning shutter 405 is opened relatively frequently, and it becomes easy to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning device 33 b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, a state in which the low probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as a "normal mode", a state in which the low probability state and the high ball entry state are referred to as a "time shortening mode", a high probability state and a high ball entry state A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”, and a state in which the high probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as a “latency mode”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, while the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L even if the jackpot state does not occur, When the variable display in the 43 R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the process is ended, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the definite change mode or the time shortening mode, the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently and it is easy to enter the ball, but the ball for the first start winning device 33a is entered. Since it is not easy to do so, when the player enters the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, the player will shoot the game ball toward the right side area (a so-called "right hit"). In addition, at the timing of such a right strike, an announcement prompting a right strike is made in the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and a second start winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip") The type of winning is changed depending on the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the electric ball,) (type determination referred to when determining the type of winning state) Tables are configured differently).

  More specifically, as a jackpot type when winning a jackpot state based on entering the first start winning device 33a, 16 round probability variation big hit (hereinafter referred to as "16 RS"), 8 round probability variation big hit ( Hereinafter, "8 RS" is referred to, 8 rounds usually hit (hereinafter "8 RN"), and 2 round probability variation big hits (hereinafter referred to as "2 RS"). With regard to “16 RS”, “8 RS” and “8 RN”, eight first variable winning devices 32 a are opened for 30 seconds, or eight first variable winning devices 32 a after first variable winning device 32 a is opened The game ball enters the ball one round, and it is repeated 16 times for "16 RS", 8 times for "8 RS" and "8 RN", and the jackpot state ends . On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state is ended after the first variable winning device 32a is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. That is, with regard to “16 RS”, “8 RS”, “8 RN”, although “2 RS” is a game ball, although it is a big hit (so-called “out ball with a big hit”) where a significant increase in game balls can be expected It has become a jackpot (so-called, "No balls out jackpot") that can not be expected to significantly increase.

  In addition, "probability change mode" is given after the big hit state of "16 RS" and "8 RS", "latency mode" is given after the big hit state of "2 RS", and after the big hit state of "8 RN" The “time reduction mode” (90 times of variable display in this example) is provided. That is, after the big hit state of “16 RS”, “8 RS” and “8 RN” is finished, the second start winning device 33 b is in a high entry state where it is easy to be opened. It will cause the ball to fire. In the present embodiment, if the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the ratio of 5% will be "16 RS" and the ratio of 55% will be "8 RS" and 30%. Then it becomes “8 RN” and it becomes “2 RS” at 10% rate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small hit is won in a lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a. If the player wins a small hit in the winning or not based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From the small hit state ends. That is, regarding the first variable winning device 32a, the appearance is the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, when “2 RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent confirmation mode, but the normal mode is continued even if the small winning is won. As a result, in the lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, the first variable prize can be obtained even without performing a distribution such that a high probability state is not awarded to a 2 round jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) It is possible to avoid a situation in which the device 32a is opened twice in a short time and it is found that the device 32a has shifted to the high probability state.

  On the other hand, as a jackpot type when winning in the jackpot state based on entering the second starting winning device 33b, 16 round probability variation big hit, 8 round probability variation big hit, 2 round normal big hit (hereinafter "2 RN" Say)). When the player wins the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is released instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends) Although the conditions are the same, although the number of payouts (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b respectively is different, for convenience of description, the second start winning device 33b The same names (“16 RS” and “8 RS”) will be used for convenience also for the type of jackpot when winning in the lottery based on entering the ball. In addition, in the present embodiment, the round end condition of the big hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition of the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. It may be different (for example, the upper limit of the game balls in the round is eight and nine).

  Further, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state ends after the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. That is, regarding "16RS" and "8RS", although a significant increase in gaming balls can be expected during the jackpot state, "2RN" is a jackpot where a significant increase in gaming balls can not be expected.

  In addition, after the jackpot state of “2 RN” ends, “time shortening mode” is given. In this example, “2 RN” is divided into three, and “2 RN 30” to which a time shortening mode for 30 times of variable display is given and “2 RN 60” to which a time shortening mode for 60 times for variable display is given There is "2 RN 90" to which a time shortening mode for 90 times of display is given. In the present embodiment, if the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b, the ratio of 35% becomes "16 RS", and the ratio of 35% is "8 RS", 20% Thus, “2 RN 30” is obtained, “2 RN 60” is obtained at a rate of 5%, and “2 RN 90” is obtained at a rate of 5%.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a small hit may be won in a lottery based on entering the ball to the second starting winning device 33b. If the player wins a small hit in the winning or losing lottery based on entering the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From the small hit state ends. That is, regarding the second variable winning device 32b, the appearance is the same as "2 RN". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, a high probability state such as the probability change mode basically shifts to the low probability state (time shortening mode etc.) by winning "2 RN", but even if it wins a small hit in the probability change mode, the probability change The mode is continued. As a result, the second variable winning device 32b is opened twice in a short time without performing distribution to win a two-round probability variation big hit "2RS" in a winning lottery based on entering the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to avoid the situation where it is understood that it has shifted to the low probability state by all means.

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and the first teaching the result of the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b The 2 special display devices 43R are respectively configured by two segment display devices, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are at positions where they can be viewed by the player (in this example, positions below the second variable winning device 32b and to the right of the second start winning device 33b where the game balls can not pass). is set up.

  Then, in response to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a, the switching display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b The switch display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the second special display device 43R upon entering the ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  Moreover, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning or losing lottery, that is, the "big hit", "by the special symbol when the variation display is stopped. It is clearly displayed that "small hit" or "out". For example, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of segments to be lit) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variation display) And, when a predetermined time has passed, any special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, in the case of winning the "big hit" in the lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the change is stopped, and a big hit state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, a jackpot type, that is, "16 RS", "8 RS", "8 RN", "2 RS", or "2 RN" is also taught. Ru. In addition, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, not one, and any one of them is selected and the stop display is performed. When one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or decision display, the other is turned off (“-” is displayed. If neither the variable display nor the determination display is performed, “−” is displayed on both of them.

  Also, when the game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display of that amount is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). The maximum number of times of the suspended variable display is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b In response to the game balls, up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are suspended.

  Further, the number of pending variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") based on the entry of gaming balls to the first start winning device 33a is disposed above the first special display device 43L, and is blue The number of pending display of fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "second fluctuation display") based on entering of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is indicated by lighting up by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit light. 2) It is arranged above the special display device 43R, and is lit and displayed by the second storage lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same manner as the first variable display and the second variable display, and the same number as the number of the first variable display or the second variable display is provided. Light. The display contents of the storage lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub control device 262 as sub control means described later. When the game ball newly wins the start-up winning units 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display for that portion is also suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of suspension of the variable display based on the entry of the game ball to the start winning device 33a, 33b is also displayed in the decorative symbol display device 42 (when the variable display is performed, the screen It will be displayed at the bottom).

  In addition, although the suspended variable display is basically to be digested in the suspended order, when both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (storage lamp 46a, In the case where one or more light sources 46b are lit, the second variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second start winning device 33b is not all digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a is performed. There is no configuration. For example, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and the second hold lamp 46b is turned on while the first hold lamp 46a is turned on, the first variation display is delayed. The second variable display is performed first.

  In the variation identification lamp 40, which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b corresponds to the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (No. 1 It is for indicating which one of the (1) variable display and the second (2) variable display), and is disposed at a position (in this example, a position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) visible to the player. The variation identification lamp 40 includes an LED of blue emission color and an LED of red emission color, and emits blue when the first variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the second variation is generated. It emits red light when the display is being performed.

  In the variable display unit 35, the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display device 41 (upper position of the stage 153 of the center frame 47) and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, which are variably displayed triggered by the passage of the through gate 34 A decorative symbol display device 42 is provided which is variably displayed in accordance with the above.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the gate 34, for example, the normal symbol "o"-> "x" → The display is switched at high speed (variation display) in the order of “o” →. Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with the symbol "o" (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is in the open state only for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of that amount is after the end of the fluctuation display being performed at that time It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). Although the maximum number of times of the variable display of the normal symbol to be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of times is held up to 4 times. In addition, the number of suspension of the variation display of the normal symbol is disposed in the variable display unit 35, and is lit and displayed by the storage lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided four each similarly to the maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and are lit by the same number as the number of the variable displays being held.

  In addition, as a high entering state, for example, (1) a state where the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low entering state, (2) one open time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) The specified number of game balls that can enter the ball for one opening of the second start winning device 33b is longer than in the low ball state, (4) The number of opening times of the second starting winning device 33b per winning of the entry support lottery is larger than that in the low entry state, (5) The winning probability of the entry support selection is from the low entry state It is also possible to keep it high. The high ball entry state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations of the above (1), (2) and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to win frequently with respect to the second start winning device 33b, and the number of times the winning or losing lottery is executed increases, and the ball has a good state of possession with the reduction of the player's ball reduced. .

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display a decorative symbol as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R. The display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  For example, the upper, middle, lower three symbol display areas are provided in the decorative symbol display device 42, and in each of the symbol display areas, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9 attached) The decorative symbols are displayed in sequence (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region) in a sequential order (variation display) and then stopped. . For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined in main controller 261, the display corresponding to the jackpot is made on first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the decoration symbol is displayed on jackpot in decoration symbol display device 42. Stop display is displayed in the combination corresponding to (for example, the upper decorative pattern display area, the middle graphic display region, and the decorative symbols variably displayed in the lower graphic display region are lined up on the predetermined effective line ) And the jackpot state is started.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the big hit, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower pattern display region as the previous step. Thus, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach condition occurs does not necessarily lead to a big hit, but it may go off.

  In this embodiment, after the reach state occurs, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region in the middle symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If it is (when Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed), a jackpot state is given. Moreover, in the case of odd number Zorozu, "16RS" or "8RS" generate | occur | produces, and in the case of even Zorozu, either "16RS", "8RS", or "8RN" generate | occur | produces.

  Basically, combinations of decorative designs other than Zorozu teach “disengagement”, but in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is “2RS” or “2RN”, the decorative design is “Zoro” Instead of being displayed as a stop in combination, it is displayed as a stop in combination that becomes the reach of the symbol. In addition, the "small hit" is also displayed as a stop in the combination that becomes the reach symbol but it becomes a deviation.

  For example, in the probability change mode, a dedicated probability change stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode (indicating the staying game mode), but winning "2 RN" causes a probability change When the mode ends, or when the player wins a "small hit", such a definite change stage is ended, and a pullback stage is displayed in which it can not be determined whether or not the definite change mode is set. Then, when “2 RN” is won and the period of the granted time shortening mode is also ended, the pulling back stage is ended, and the normal mode (very likely) is indicated. Start displaying the stage. If the player wins the "small hit", since there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit", the probability change mode remains. Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to win a jackpot, and furthermore, if it exceeds the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (90 times of variation display of special symbol), it is grasped that it is the definite change mode be able to.

  In addition, as mentioned above, the correspondence between the stop pattern of the special symbol in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the jackpot type is grasped, and the stop pattern of the special symbol variation display which taught the occurrence of the big hit or the small hit is confirmed If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot was won. In addition, in the case of winning a big hit by the lottery that is performed based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, as a big hit type to display the Zoro eye in the decorative symbol display device 42 "16RS" and "8RS" There is only. For this reason, basically (with the exception of the case where the variable display corresponding to the entering of the first start winning device 33a which has been suspended is digested) in the decoration symbol display device 42 in the definite variation mode or the time shortening mode When the jackpot instruction is given, the assignment of the definite variation mode is determined.

  Also, for example, in the normal mode, the normal stage is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect corresponding to the game mode, but when “2 RS” is won to shift to the probability change mode or “small hit” When the player wins the "", the normal stage ends, and a precursor stage in which it can not be determined whether or not the mode is the definite change mode is displayed. In this embodiment, when the "small hit" is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode, this precursor stage is a variable symbol of a special symbol, and a period of about 10 to 50 times. After being derived at, it is usually returned to the stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. It should be noted that a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to return to the normal stage from the precursor stage, or to return to the precursor stage again after returning to the normal stage from the precursor stage (in the case of the latent mode , It is desirable to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage). In addition, in the case of winning the "8 RN" in the lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and although it was elected "8 RS", a definite change mode is granted until the end of the jackpot state When the jackpot state is not taught, the process moves to the pullback stage after the end of the jackpot state.

  Further, on the game board 30, there are attached rails 50 for guiding the game balls fired from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30, which are composed of an inner rail structure 51 and an outer rail structure 52. As a result, the game balls fired in response to the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the firing rails 61 and the rails 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming balls guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area once return to the inside of the rail 50 again. Further, a rubber return 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail configuration portion 52. The game ball fired with a predetermined momentum or more strikes the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is disconnected at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is disconnected at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes back the rail 50 until it passes the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail configuration parts 51 and 52 are removed from the game area It is eaten.

  In the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is characterized. The second start winning device 33b will be mainly described below with reference to FIGS. The second start winning device 33b is formed substantially in a box formed with a base plate 401 attached along the front surface of the game board 30, and a start winning opening 402 formed to protrude on the front side of the base plate 401 and opening upward. -Shaped winning box 403, a second start winning switch 224b (see FIG. 40) for detecting the gaming ball entering the starting winning opening 402, and closing for disabling entry of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening 402 A start winning shutter 405 movable between a position and an open position for entering a ball, a solenoid (not shown) for operating the start winning shutter 405, and guiding the gaming ball toward the start winning opening 402 A guide stand 407 is provided. In the present embodiment, the start winning hole 402 corresponds to the specific winning hole, and the start winning shutter 405 and a solenoid for operating the start winning shutter 405 constitute an open / close member.

  The start winning combination shutter 405 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a play area is formed on the base plate 401 directly above the start winning combination opening 402 (hereinafter referred to as "accommodation opening 408"). The opening and closing winning opening 402 is opened and closed. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 39, in the open state of the second start winning device 33b, the entire start winning shutter 405 is accommodated at the back side of the housing opening 408, and as shown in FIG. In the closed state of 33 b, the entire start winning hole 402 is covered by the starting winning shutter 405. Further, both sides of the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 in the state where the start winning opening 402 is closed and the front edge thereof are supported by the peripheral edge of the starting winning opening 402. In the present embodiment, the peripheral edge portion of the start winning hole 402 supporting the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 constitutes a receiving member. In addition, a reinforcing rib 409 is formed on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405.

  The guide stand 407 is disposed at the upper right of the start winning opening 402, and the gaming ball that has reached the second starting winning device 33b from the upstream side of the game area is viewed from a substantially fixed direction with respect to the starting winning opening 402. In order to guide from the upper right, it is provided. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the second start winning device 33 b is configured by various game members such as game nails disposed above the second start winning device 33 b and special effects for decoration. The movement route of the game ball is limited so that the game ball which has reached to the first must enter the guide stand 407 first. That is, the gaming ball entering the second start winning device 33b (possibly having the possibility of entering the starting winning opening 402) always jumps out of the guide stand 407 toward the upper position of the start winning shutter 405 located on the lower left. It is supposed to work. In the present embodiment, the position at which the gaming ball is guided by the guide stand 407 and jumps out corresponds to a specific point, and the start winning shutter 405 is disposed at the specific point.

  Furthermore, various game members guiding the game balls to the guide stand 407 are configured such that the momentum of the game balls reaching the guide stand 407 can be suppressed as much as possible (for example, the guide face is not steep but gentle slope near horizontal direction Etc.). As a result, the speed, pop-out angle, etc. of the game ball guided by the guide stand 407 are approximated as much as possible. In the present embodiment, the guide stand 407 and a game nail, a decorative role, etc. for guiding the game ball to the guide stand 407 constitute a rectifying means.

  Between the winning box 403 and the guide stand 407, an opening through which the game ball can pass (hereinafter referred to as a "discharge opening 411") is provided. That is, gaming balls that do not enter the start winning hole 402 are discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33 b through the discharge opening 411.

  By the way, on the upper surface side of the winning box 403, an introduction path 412 is formed adjacent to the left of the start winning opening 402 for guiding the gaming ball backward (the back side of the game board 30). That is, when the start winning opening 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405 (the second start winning device 33 b is in the closed position), the game is guided to the starting winning opening 402 from the upper right by the guide stand 407 The ball is restricted from winning into the starting winning opening 402 by the starting winning shutter 405 and passes the upper surface of the starting winning shutter 405 by the momentum guided from the guide stand 407 and is adjacent to the left of the starting winning shutter 405 It enters into the introduction path 412 which

  The top surface of the start winning shutter 405 and the introduction path 412 of this embodiment are inclined downward to the right, but the game balls guided from the guide stand 407 are guided so that they can move up and run. The tilt, length, relative position, etc. of the table 407 are designed.

  Further, the base plate 401 is formed with an opening communicating with the introduction path 412 (hereinafter referred to as “detour opening 413”). The bypass opening 413 is formed between the introduction path 412 and the left portion of the start winning opening 402.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the base plate 401, a turn box 415 provided with a re-entry path 414 for releasing the gaming ball having entered the detour opening 413 from the introduction path 412 above the start winning opening 402 is attached. ing. The re-entry path 414 is constituted by an outward path 416 on the left side and a return path 417 on the right side at the central portion in the width direction of the turn box 415. The rear ends of the forward path 416 and the return path 417 are continuous, but on the front side of the rear path, a partition rib 418 is formed so as not to allow passage between the forward path 416 and the return path 417. The forward passage 416 is continuous with the introduction passage 412 via the bypass opening 413 and is inclined rearward and to the right. The return path 417 is continuous with the rear portion of the forward path 416 and is connected to the bypass opening 413 located immediately above the start winning hole 402 and is inclined forward.

  When the flow of gaming balls in the second start winning device 33b is confirmed, first, when the gaming balls guided to the guide stand 407 and jumped out to the start winning opening 402 reach the top right of the starting winning opening 402 When the start winning opening 402 is opened, the gaming ball jumps into the opening start winning opening 402 which is opened as it is to be won, and is detected by the second start winning switch 224b.

  On the other hand, when the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the starting winning shutter 405 when the gaming ball guided by the guide stand 407 and jumping out to the starting winning opening 402 reaches just above the starting winning opening 402 When the game ball lands on the top surface of the start winning shutter 405, the game ball moves leftward and enters the introduction path 412. Furthermore, from the introductory path 412, it will jump out above the start winning opening 402 via the re-entry path 414 again. At this time, if the start winning opening 402 is opened, it will win in the starting winning opening 402. On the other hand, if the starting winning opening 402 is closed by the start winning shutter 405, the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 It is guided to the lower right and discharged from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second starting winning device 33b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high entry state in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is substantially open (the start winning opening 402 is substantially open). ing). For example, in the high entering state, the winning probability of the entry support lottery is 99/100, and the variation display time of the normal symbol displaying the result of the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and the entry support lottery is won , 4 seconds opening is repeated 3 times with 0.4 seconds closing period. For this reason, even if the start winning opening 402 is accidentally closed when jumping out from the guide stand 407 and positioned immediately above the starting winning opening 402, the starting winning opening again through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. When reaching directly above 402, it is very likely that the start winning opening 402 is open. In this embodiment, the time from the guide stand 407 to the top of the start winning opening 402 via the top surface of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 is approximately one second. ~ 2 seconds are assumed.

  Furthermore, even if a predetermined game ball tries to rush into the start winning opening 402 a second time, even if the start winning shutter 405 is closed and the start winning opening 402 can not be won, the game ball is started. If it is on the upper surface of the winning shutter 405, the starting winning opening 402 will be entered. In particular, in the present embodiment, the return path 417 of the re-entry path 414 is located on the upstream left side of the top surface of the start winning shutter 405 inclined downward toward the discharge opening 411 on the right side. The left end of the start winning opening 402 is connected. Therefore, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position when the game ball jumps out of the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the game ball is kept for a relatively long time (start winning shutter It is configured to stay on the start winning shutter 405 by rolling a long distance as much as possible from the left side to the right side of the upper surface 405.

  Therefore, in the high ball entry state, almost all the game balls will enter the start winning hole 402 of the second start winning device 33b when the player strikes the right. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out is one when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (when the detection of the game ball by the second start winning switch 224b is performed) However, the probability change mode and the time reduction mode can be enjoyed without substantially reducing the player's game balls. In addition, since the suspension of the change display of the special symbol is almost uninterrupted, the game can be advanced with ease.

  On the other hand, in the low ball entry state, the winning probability of the entry support lottery is 1/100, the variation display time of the normal symbol is 8 seconds, and 0.4 seconds of opening is 1 when winning the entry support lottery. It is done only once. For this reason, even if "right-handed" is performed in the normal mode or the latent determination mode, the game ball is made to enter the second start winning device 33b, and it is almost impossible to expect to receive a winning lottery. Therefore, in the normal mode or the latent probability mode, the game ball with the firing strength such that the game ball flows in the "left side area" on the left side of the variable display unit 35 for the purpose of entering the first start winning device 33a. Will be fired (“hit left”). By the way, in this embodiment, when the game ball is hit “left”, the game ball can not be entered into the second variable winning device 32 b and the second start winning device 33 b, and the game ball is through gate. 34 can not pass through. Furthermore, when the game ball is "right-handed", the game ball can not be entered into the first variable winning device 32a and the first start winning device 33a.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b is provided on the downstream side of the game area than the second variable winning device 32 b. Further, in the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 32b is opened, almost all the game balls moving in the right side area are blocked by the shutter of the second variable winning device 32b, and the second variable winning device 32b The device 32b is to be awarded. Therefore, during the round of the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, the game balls hardly flow toward the second start winning device 33b.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning combination shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the re-entry path 414 constitute time difference passing opportunity giving means. Further, the entry support lottery corresponds to the opening and closing lottery, the first state corresponds to the low entry state, and the second state corresponds to the high entry state. Further, the function of the main control unit 261, which will be described later in detail, performs an entrance support lottery, constitutes an open / close lottery means.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 to the upper tray 19. Further, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail forming portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launcher 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns the rail 50 back as a far ball, the far ball is moved to the lower tray 15 through the far ball passage 72. Exhausted.

  Further, reference numeral 67 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 is a payout passage for guiding the gaming balls paid out by the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end on the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71. The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 become full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication passage 71 side (the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71 overflows), It will be dispensed to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. By the presence of the full detection switch, it is determined that the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls (the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls and the gaming balls are stagnant in the lower plate communication path 71) be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using the display, the voice, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 42 Control is performed. In addition, the stagnation of the gaming ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated, and when the gaming ball is not detected by the fullness detection switch (when it is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear face configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged up and down, right and left so as to be partially overlapped in front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And protective covers made of resin are attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, so that unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" herein.

  First, the rear face configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind 213 is provided to project rearward. In addition, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45 and the sub control device 262 can be detached Is attached to

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42 a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the frame cover 213 It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub controller 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262 a and fixed to the back side of the display controller 45 (substrate box 45 a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving an LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

  Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a substrate box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member can not be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. Thus, it can be easily found that the substrate box 263 has been tampered with.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting the game ball having entered the various winning openings, corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b are provided with a first count switch. A second count switch 223b is provided. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. A 1-board relay board is provided. The first board relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like to the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results respectively detected by the various ball entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the payout number of gaming balls) according to the winning situation in each case is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are calculated based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, on the back of the game board 30, although not shown, there is provided a winning opening solenoid for opening the winning opening with the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b. There is provided a winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the start winning shutter 405 by the start winning device 33b. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) for relaying these solenoids and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin molded back pack 351 and a payout mechanism portion 352 of the game ball. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened backward with the open and close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a hall computer or the like of the game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, although the code is not attached, for example, a terminal for outputting information related to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability change mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by the open detection switch 91, 92 described later Terminals for outputting information on the opening of 12; terminals for outputting information on various error conditions such as a ball entry error, lower bowl full error, tank ball no error, payout error, etc .; an award to be paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information on the number of balls is provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, an ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 together. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the substrate box 263 and the terminal portion (substrate side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The dispensing mechanism portion 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and gaming balls supplied from an island facility of the game hall are successively supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, there is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the lateral direction and which slopes gently toward the downstream side, and further, on the downstream side of the tank rail 356, a case rail 357 longitudinally. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

  In addition, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 352, and a power switch board 382 for fetching the main power from the outside is installed. There is. A main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382 a.

  Under the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and the game ball is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the gaming balls having won in the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are separately formed and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, the dispensing control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be removed Is attached to

  The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for the sake of convenience, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed substrate).

  In addition, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the substrate box 311 a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313 a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). A sealing member is provided in the substrate box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is accommodated, and an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection substrate 314 is accommodated in the substrate box 314a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be viewed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state recovery switch 321 which protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed at the occurrence of a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor unit, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and maintains the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and may restore the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (power recovery) it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of business in the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so when returning to the initial state when the power is turned on Throw in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and one side is rotated by one. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 covering the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of the outer frame 11, and to operate the locking device 600 by the said wire etc. As a result, defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extension wall 83 covers the right end (the end on the left side in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12 The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 can not be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the front lower right portion (right side of the launcher 60) of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right rear portion (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be inserted into and withdrawn from the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided such that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided such that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main unit, the on signal is output to the main control device 261, and the detection unit is pressed to the switch main unit side and in the state of being retracted into the switch main unit It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back of the front frame set 14 and turned off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the projecting state. It will be on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed on the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off, and detection is performed when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the projecting state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as a main control means is mounted with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. And a backup area 503a.

  In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a includes a power-off time (including a power-down occurrence) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off. The same is an area for storing values such as stack pointers, registers, and I / O. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure cancellation). Is executed in A power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542 described later is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The occurrence of the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input / output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543 to be described later, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, various switches of winning opening switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, start winning switches 224a and 224b, through gate switch 225, and handle 18 are provided at input / output port 505. Etc., various substrates, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, although the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (substrate side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions and the like.

  The sub control unit 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc., the input / output port 554, the bus line 555, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data transmission / reception circuit, etc. Is equipped. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, to the input / output port 554, the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46a and 46b, the effect button 125, various electric decoration parts, and the lamps 102 to 104 are connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are configured to display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262 In the decorative symbol display device 42 that is controlled, the variable display (of the decorative symbol) is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable display of (the special symbol in) the special display devices 43L, 43R.

  Further, the payout control device 311 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program to be executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and data can be held (backup), and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a is a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and so on, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area is for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. As in the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout control of the winning balls by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer in which the command sent from the device is stored.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the winning balls, and is turned on when the specific command for permitting the payout of the winning balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and the initialization is performed. It is turned off when it is restored before processing or power off. In this embodiment, a specific command is a payout initialization command that instructs initialization processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a winning ball command that instructs payout of a winning ball, and the main control device 261 is restored. There are three of the payout return commands sent in case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received, and similar to the payout permission flag, processing of initial setting or power off It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and turned off when determination of the command received by the command determination process is performed.

  The command buffer is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input / output port 515 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312, a payout device 358, and the like.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. , And are electrically connected to each other, and take in a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. The card unit connection board 314 can be omitted in a cash machine in which the game balls are directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from the ball lending device or the like without passing through the card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the release control signal 311 outputs a release permission signal, the player detects that the handle 18 is touched by a sensor signal, and the release prohibition button 18a for stopping the release The launch device 60 is driven on the condition that the game ball is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And have. The input port 527 is connected to an input / output port 554 of the sub controller 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and to the output port 529, a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 526 should be referred to as a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. The +12 V power supply, the +5 V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. An operation power supply (+12 V power supply, +5 V power supply, etc.) is supplied to the emission control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to occurrence of power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The blackout signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the power failure process even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can execute and complete the power failure processing normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (including the power on due to a power failure cancellation) while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. Ru.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as a main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a random number counter C1 used for a lottery for determining whether a jackpot state is to be generated, a type determination counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type (class lottery), and decoration Fluctuation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not reach condition is generated in symbol display device 42, initial value random number counter CINI used to set initial value of pass / fail random number counter C1, and first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) used for lottery of the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used to determine the variation display time etc. of the normal symbol display device 41 (ball support support lottery) It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C4. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery of reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is detached and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and the variation time, ie, the presentation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

  The counters C 1, C 2, C 3, C INI, CS 1, CS 2, C 4 are loop counters which return 1 to the previous value each time they are updated and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 has a special variation suspension area as a suspension storage area in which the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored A change holding area is provided. The normal change pending area is provided with one execution area and four pending areas (pending first to pending fourth areas). In each reserve area of the ordinary variation reserve area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passage history of the gaming ball to the through gate 34. By adopting the configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  Further, the special variation reserve area includes a first special variation reserve area and a second special variation storage area each including four reserve areas (preserve first to reserve fourth area), and one execution area. In each reserve area of the first special variation reserve area, each value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the gaming ball to the first starting winning device 33a. It is stored in series. In each reserve area of the second special variation reserve area, each value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is set according to the winning history of the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b. It is stored in series. By adopting the configuration, it is possible to hold the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R up to four times.

  Describing each of the counters in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 599) as the closing value, and then 0 which is the lower limit as the opening price. It is configured to return to. Usually, when the pass / fail random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 stored in the yes / no random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation reserve area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C1 that becomes the big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”, and the high probability In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, two success / failure determination tables that are referred to when determining whether the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit are provided in the ROM 502, and the “7, 307” is hit heavily There is a first success / failure determination table stored as a value, and a second success / failure determination table stored as “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is used, if the jackpot is not won, a lottery is performed to determine whether the jackpot is won or not. In the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode), the number of the value of the random number counter C1 which is small hit is one, the value is "404", and the high probability state (probability change mode, latency mode) In the case of), the number of values of the random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and its value is "404 to 413". Note that the first small hit determination table storing "404" as a winning value and the second small hit determination table storing "405 to 413" as a winning value are referred to for the small hit success / failure determination.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, the probability of winning in a small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600, The fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) takes 0.4 seconds when winning in the ball entry support lottery. It is released.

  In the probability variation mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small jackpot probability is 1/60, which makes it easier for the player to hit a jackpot or a jackpot as compared to the normal mode. In the definite change mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode, and when the entry support lottery is won, the second The start winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is four seconds (opening for four seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the definite change mode, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is extended and Will increase. As a result, the time zone in which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is extended, so the gaming ball frequently enters the second start winning device 33b (high entering state). The lottery will be made continuously and the ball will be in good condition. In the high ball entering state, the probability that the “o” symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery) may be made higher than that in the normal mode.

  In the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the small hitting probability is 1/600. Also, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times if the entry support lottery is won. And each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time reduction mode is the same low probability as the normal mode when the jackpot probability is the same, but when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen, it is the same as the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state of “8 RN” or “2 RN”, the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R in total show the variable number of times of the specified times (90 uniformly after “8 RN” Thus, “2 RN” sets the time reduction mode over 30 cases (“2 RN 30”), 60 cases (“2 RN 60”), and 90 cases (“2 RN 90”). In addition, the time reduction mode ends at the point when the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the fluctuation display of the specified number of times even if the jackpot state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. Further, in the latent determination mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when winning in the ball entry support lottery, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, the latent probability mode is the same high probability as the probability variation mode when the jackpot probability is the same, but when looking at only the operation of the second start winning device 33b, it is the same as the normal mode. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of “2RS” ends, the latent mode is entered, and continues until at least the jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning by the lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, there is no allocation to win the "2 RN", so the latent mode ends silently The situation like that is avoided (it will be continued until winning a jackpot with balls).

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 19 and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19). Further, in the ROM 502, a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a), which is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, second type determination A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of the type of jackpot state to be granted is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), the jackpot state of the determined type is It will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the reach state occurs similarly to the “front and back out of reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by only one before and after the reach symbol. After the final final stop design stops other than the front and rear reach design, it is decided to draw out "reach out except back and forth deviation" and "complete out" that reach condition does not occur. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table storing the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. In the reach determination table, the value of "0 to 238" is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the other than back and forth, C3 = 22 to 238 is completely It is configured to respond to the disconnection.

  The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. .

  Also, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially added one by one within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59), it is the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to return 1 to 0, which is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37). It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decoration symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after reach occurrence. A more detailed pattern variation mode is determined, such as the elapsed time until the stop (in this example, the middle pattern). Therefore, various combinations of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42.

  Note that the size and range of each counter are merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 be different prime numbers and be values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Also, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, 99, then returns to the lower limit value 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the gaming ball passes either the left or right through gate 34. Low entry The number of random numbers to be won in the ball state is 1. The range is 1. On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("O" in this example) stops Shown, it is opened in a pattern second start winning opening 473 corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into main processing activated upon turning on the power, timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in this embodiment, in 2 msec cycle), and stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The NMI interrupt process is activated by the input of the above, and for convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, while reading the states of various switches (except the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, when there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (game balls are dispensed) ). Further, upon the output of the prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). , 238, and 99), respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, start-up winning processing accompanying the winning of the start-up winning unit 33 is executed, and in step S305, through-gate passing processing accompanying passing of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily ended.

  Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the RAM 503, a first hold counter Na that counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by winning on the first start winning apparatus 33a, and pending of variable displays triggered by winning on the second start winning apparatus 33b. A second hold counter Nb is provided to count the number.

  Also, in the execution area and the respective reserve areas of the special variation reserve area, a pass / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the pass / fail random number storage area stores the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Further, each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and stores the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Furthermore, the execution area of the special fluctuation reserve area is a fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) based on entering the ball into the first start winning device 33a, or based on entering the ball into the second start winning device 33b. A fluctuation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether it is fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) is stored. Hereinafter, "the fact that information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and that "the second variation display is in the variation storage area" The fact that the information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second change flag is set on”.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the second start winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the following step S504, the values of the random number counter C1 updated in the random number update processing of the step S303, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the random number counter buffer of the determination random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer) Each stored value) is stored in the first area (a random number storage area, a win type random number storage area, and a reach random number storage area) of free storage areas of the special variation storage area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to a large hit or a small hit is performed. The details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. Perform type determination processing to determine the type of The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is out based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the success or failure determination process of step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area matches one of “7” and “307”, which is the value stored in the first validity determination table. Determine if By the way, "7" and "307" are values that become jackpots in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  Although the process of step S5101 is simplified and described in FIG. 14 for the sake of convenience, it is actually determined whether the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is "7" and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 is "307", and if affirmed determination is made in either of these determinations, then affirmed determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made Also in the case where the negative determination is made, the negative determination is made in the step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first success or failure flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, in addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, information on whether or not a big hit condition occurs in the success or failure random number storage area is not provided separately. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the pass / fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in the step S5102, for example, "1010101010101010" is set in the pass / fail random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the pass / fail random number storage area will be described as turning on the first pass / fail flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value stored in the second pass / fail determination table. It is determined whether or not it is "316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that is a jackpot only in the probability variation mode. Incidentally, also in the case of the determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big hit actually coincide with each other as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success or failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. When the second pass / fail flag is turned on, this means that, for example, “11001011011001100” is set for the pass / fail random number storage area.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, even if the high probability state is "out", in step S5105, the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the first It is determined whether or not it matches the value "404" stored in the small hit determination table. By the way, "404" is a value which becomes a small hit even in the low probability state or the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the information as to whether or not the small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the pass / fail random number storage area.

  When negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hitting determination table "405 to 413" It is determined whether or not By the way, “405 to 413” is a value that is a jackpot only in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process ends.

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, since information relating to the pass / fail is stored using 2 bytes, for example, when noise occurs, the pass / fail flag (stored contents of the pass / fail random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot state when the player is not winning, or the occurrence of a jackpot state when the player is elected. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the pass / fail random number storage area in the pass / fail judgment processing is a pattern not used when storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in the pass / fail random number storage area. is there.

  In addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, a success or failure flag is separately provided, and the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 is kept stored at this time. In the variation display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, and the pass / fail may be determined. Further, a small random number counter may be provided separately from the success or failure random number counter C1 used for the jackpot determination.

  Next, the second type determination process of step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second yes / no flag is set to ON in the yes / no determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a big hit will occur), in step S5402, the second type determination table is referred to, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16 RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, the 16 RS flag or the like is not separately provided, but "16 RS" or the like in the winning type random number storage area. Is configured to store (overwrite) information. As described above, the winning classification random number storage area uses one byte, and in the step S5403, for example, "10101010" is set in the winning classification random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, that a pattern indicating a big hit type such as “16 RS” is set in the win type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag (16 RS flag or the like) indicating a big hit type. explain. The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the win type random number storage area in the type determination process is not used when storing the value of the type determination counter C2 in the win type random number storage area It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5402, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5404 and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to “8 RS”. It is determined whether or not any of "7 to 13" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set for the winning type random number storage area) in step S5405, and then the process ends.

  If NO in step S5404, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5406, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2 RN 30". It is determined whether or not one of "14 to 17" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN 30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

  If NO in step S5406, the second type determination table is referred to in step S5408, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2 RN 60". It is determined whether or not it matches "18". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the 2RN 60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S5408 is negative, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special change reserving area is “19” corresponding to “2 RN 90”. After turning on the flag, this processing ends. In the type determination process, it is sufficient that the type of jackpot can be determined. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16 RS” having a large number of random numbers corresponding to winning matches the acquired random value, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2 RN 90” matches the acquired random number value.

  Next, the reach determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first success or failure flag is set in the success or failure determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (the big hit state always occurs), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the big hit state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility that it will be out), the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5302 It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reserving area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "reach before and after". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front / rear deviation reach is turned on, and then the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, the front and back flags are not separately provided, and information indicating that the reach random number storage area is "back and forth out of reach". Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in the step S5303, for example, "10101010" is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5304, and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area corresponds to "reach other than out of order". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of the values "2 to 21". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on in step S5305, and the process ends. Note that turning on the flag other than the front and back here means that, for example, “11001100” is set for the reach random number storage area.

  Further, in the case where the negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, in the case of “complete removal” in which the variable display ends without passing through the reach state, the present processing ends. The pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 in the reach random number storage area is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a setting process of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that in the advance command, the fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of fluctuation display) which is stored pending is triggered by which of the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b enters. Together with information indicating whether or not to be included, and information indicating the result of the success / failure determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S508, or when the negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start winning device 33 by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminates by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S510, the value of the first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment) It is determined whether it is less than "4". If a negative determination is made in step S510, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the following step S512, each value of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is displayed as a vacant holding area of the special variation hold area (a probability random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) Store in). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to the big hit is performed. The details of the success or failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. A first type determination process is performed to determine the type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b. The distribution of jackpot types to be granted is different.

  Here, the first type determination process of step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second yes / no flag is set to ON in the yes / no determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a big hit will occur), in step S5202, the first type determination table is referred to, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area It is determined whether the value of C2 matches the value "0" corresponding to "16 RS". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "8 RN". It is determined whether or not one of "12 to 17" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

  If NO in step S5204, the first type determination table is referred to in step S5206, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2RS". It is determined whether or not one of "18, 19" is matched. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and the present process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the win / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit. Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing is performed to determine the type of reach. The details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S515, in step S516, the process of setting the preceding command is performed, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the random number counter C1 etc. is directly stored in the special change reserve area, and then the judgment processing is performed. Although the type determination processing and the reach determination processing are executed, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, there is provided a temporary storage area (work area) for temporarily storing the counter values when the value etc. of the random number counter C1 is acquired, and regarding the information stored in the temporary memory area After the determination process and the reach determination process are performed, a configuration may be employed in which the corresponding special variation reserve area is stored in the reserve area.

  Next, the through gate passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, it is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225 whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through gate 34, the number of pending variable display performed in normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present processing ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step S603 on condition that the value of the normal hold counter Nc <4 and the normal hold counter Increment Nc by one.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to the pass / fail is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of the step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal variation reserving area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503 a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and performs the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the occurrence of power-off is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such an NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control under execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon power-on reset.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power on is performed. Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, the RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON), and if pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (delete) the backup data. Do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case. If occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 etc.). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, at the time of opening of the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM (step S113 etc.). In addition, when the occurrence information of the power failure is not set, or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.), the process similarly shifts to the initialization process (step S113 etc.) of the RAM 503. That is, in step S113, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S114, an initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition that power generation interruption information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal are satisfied. In addition, the processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In step S109, a command to return the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the start winning unit 33, etc. updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is Execute external output processing to transmit to each control device.

  For example, at the time of variation display of a decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42, a variation pattern command, a symbol command and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 having input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands. Is instructed to the display control device 45 so as to display (variation display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative symbol, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. The variation pattern command and the like are originally binary numbers of 2 bytes (the same output method as the hold information command), but are indicated by a hexadecimal number of 4 bits for convenience. In the present embodiment, for example, one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is a variation pattern command in the normal mode and the latency mode, for example. It is set. Further, in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, and “FD16” are set. On the other hand, in the sub-control device 262, the relationship between the variation pattern command and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored as a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the change pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and the voice.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special display is displayed except for the variation of the decorative symbol. Then, “FF11” or “FD11” is set in the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the definite change mode and the time shortening mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode and the latency mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent mode, and “10 seconds” in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  In Super Reach, characters etc. are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol while the decorative symbol is being variably displayed (after reaching the reach condition), and this is a reach pattern that brings a sense of expectation to the player. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as the super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. And if it is a super reach SR1, "FF12" or "FD12" is set as the variation pattern command, if it is a super reach SR2, "FF13" or "FD13" is set, if it is a super reach SR3, "FF14" or "FD14" Is set.

  Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after reaching the reaching state), a character or the like having a pattern different from the super reach is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol. It is a reach pattern that causes the player to have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. And if it is premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" will be set to a change pattern command. In the case of the premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

  In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set as the variation pattern command according to the mode to the variation pattern command corresponding to "completely out" which is not in any reach state. In the present embodiment, the variable display time which is completely out is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent mode, and to "6 seconds" in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (a combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub controller 262 to determine the stop symbol, and a combination of probability variation big hit symbols, a combination of normal big hit symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a combination of front and back off symbols, a complete off design It designates five categories of combinations of. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “AA11”, “AA12”, “AA13”, “AA14”, “AA15”, and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the division of the stop symbol and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win a probability change jackpot ("16 RS" and "8 RS", hereinafter also referred to as "probability with a probability change jackpot") that you can expect an increase in game balls, or a regular big hit you expect an increase in game balls ("8 RN") Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol attached with the number pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of Zoro when the player wins the prize "also referred to as a" with a ball ". It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “with a certain probability variation big hit”, the probability variation big hit design or 2 which is a combination of 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 odd-numbered zoroku decorative symbols The variable display is stopped by any combination of the normal jackpot design, which is a combination of decorative patterns consisting of even numbers of 4, 6, and 8 even numbers, and in the case of "with a jackpot normal jackpot" Usually, the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols.

  Then, in the case of the popped ball existence probability variation big hit, "AA11" is set to the symbol command, and in the case of the popped ball presence normally hit, "AA12" is set to the symbol command. Then, when “AA11” is set to the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the 1 to 9 Zoromes as the stop symbol, and “AA12”. If "is set," one of the symbol combinations consisting of any of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is selected as the stop symbol.

  The combination of the front and back outset design corresponds to the “front and back out of reach reach” where the final stop design is shifted by one before and after the reach design after reaching reach and corresponds to the combination of front and back outset design "AA13" is set to the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop modes corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "small hit" are also a combination of front and rear off symbols. The combination of the symbols other than the front and back is a symbol corresponding to the "reach other than back and forth deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops other than the front and back of the reach symbol after reach is generated. "AA14" is set to the command. The combination of completely out of the pattern corresponds to "completely out of place" where even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of out of pattern completely. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the front and back sides of the symbol, the combination of the front and back sides, and the combination of the front and back sides are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the display is “off”.

  Although details will be described later, when "AA13" to "AA15" are set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Decide as. In the present embodiment, three commands “AA13” to “AA15” are prepared as symbol commands for detachment, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, only one type of symbol command for detachment is available. The sub controller 262 may be configured to determine the combination of the decorative symbols.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit (59 and 37 in this embodiment), as in the other counters. Do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of a jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when the player wins the lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the jackpot state or the small hitting state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. There is. Details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the player wins in the lottery based on the entry to the second starting winning device 33b, the jackpot state or the small hitting state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. There is. Details of the second variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S208, a normal display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the normal display control process will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the start winning unit 33 is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if occurrence information of power-off is not set in the backup area 503a, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come in step S211, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is performed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It repeatedly executes (step S212, step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the change type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S201-S210 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time, and the fluctuation similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power is turned off. It will be. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in step S216 in step S216. Remember to

  Thereafter, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is inhibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed.

  Note that the process of step S210 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed at steps S201 to S209 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is small compared to the case where each processing is halfway And can be easily stored. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before storing data (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off, and the state before the power shutoff can be reliably stored. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, a hit situation storage area to be described later is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not it is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state now. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L, 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, After the final round, the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the special display device There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L, 43R, to when the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened; After the final round, the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the special display device There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

  In the win situation storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored in the round period, and "3" is stored in the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether the jackpot state or the small hitting state is in progress. It should be noted that the fact that numerical values such as "0" to "3" are stored in the hit situation storage area is for convenience, and in fact the hit situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if a large hit state or a small hit state is in progress, the present processing is ended as it is, while if a positive determination is made in step S801, details will be described later in step S802. During the special figure display flag to be set is checked, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42). Specifically, it is considered that the variable display is in progress if the special view display flag is in the on state, and it is considered that the stop display in the variable display stop state is considered when the special view display flag is in the off state. . In addition, although the details will be described later, the flag during special image display is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R It is turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  Then, if the negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state nor in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to step S803 and is triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds of the variable display (second variable display) is greater than zero.

  If a positive determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is stored pending, 1 is subtracted from the second storage counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second change display is reserved and stored by the determination process of step S803, the second change display is performed without executing the first change display. That is, even if the first changeable display is reserved and stored earlier than the second changeable display, the second changeable display is prioritized and digested (the first changeable display is delayed). ing.

  In the subsequent step S805, a process of shifting data stored in the second special variation reserved area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas for suspension in the second special variation suspension area toward the execution area, and the first area for suspension → the execution area, the second for suspension Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit light in red. Thereafter, in step S 807, the variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then the process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when no second variable display is stored on hold, in step S808, a variable display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a ( It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na that counts the number of holds of the first variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S809. In the subsequent step S810, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the first special variation reserved area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the first special variation reserved area to the execution area side, and the first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S810, in step S811, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit blue light. Thereafter, the variable display setting process is performed in step S 807, and the process ends. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation reserve area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation reserve area and the second special fluctuation reserve area is subjected to the fluctuation display based on the data Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, the details of the variable display setting process of step S 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability change mode or latency mode). Discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored in the mode storage area. In the present embodiment, one of the values “11”, “12”, “21”, and “22” is stored in the mode storage area, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, "21" corresponds to the probability variation mode, and "22" corresponds to the latent mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state by determining whether "21" or "22" is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is in a high probability state (probability change mode, latency mode), in step S902, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not one of the first and second pass / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a high probability state in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If the negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode), in step S903, the first random flag is turned on by referring to the random number storage area Determine if it is not. If a positive determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, the jackpot determination flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been determined is set on. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the big hit state in the pass / fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the big hit determination flag ON.

  In the following step S 905, whether or not the second change flag is set ON, taking into account the change storage area of the execution area of the special change reserve area, that is, the change display performed this time is to the second start winning device 33 b. It is determined whether or not it is a second variable display for teaching the result of a win / fall lottery triggered by entering the ball. When an affirmative determination is made in step S905, in step S906, the 16RS flag (see the type determination processing in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16) is set to ON, taking into consideration the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area. It is judged whether it is done or not.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, in the case of "16 RS", 16 RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing variable display for teaching generation of “16RS”, and special processing is performed based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the buffer for counter of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are prescribed in advance by a table or the like. After step S 907, the process proceeds to step S 931 described later.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S906, in step S908, it is determined whether the 8RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is "8 RS", an 8 RS pattern setting process is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN 30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, 2RN 30 pattern setting processing is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if the negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether the 2RN 60 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN 60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN 90 flag is set to ON, the 2 RN 90 pattern setting process is performed in step S 914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S905, that is, if the variable display performed this time is the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery that is triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether the 16RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S915, in step S917, it is determined whether the 8RS flag is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if it is "8 RS", an 8 RS pattern setting process is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether the 8 RN flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8 RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if the negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set to ON, the 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is referred to It is determined whether the second small hit flag is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the small winning is won in the high probability state, it is indicated that the small hitting state has been determined in step S923. Set the hit confirmation flag on. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the small hitting state in the pass / fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the small hitting determination flag on. Thereafter, in step S924, the small hitting pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If a positive determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that the small winning is won in the low probability state, the small hitting determination flag is set to ON in step S923, and in step S924 After performing the small hitting pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S 931.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if neither big hit nor small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into account and the front and back flags It is determined whether or not 17) the reach determination processing is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, in the case of "reach before and after out of reach", after performing the front and rear reach pattern setting processing in step S927, the process proceeds to step S931.

  If the negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the flag other than the front or back is on. If the affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is the "reach other than back and forth deviation", reach pattern setting processing other than back and forth is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is "complete removal", out-of-variation pattern setting processing is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S 931, a special figure in-display flag indicating whether variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43 L and 43 R is set to on. This indicates that the conditions for performing the switching display (variation display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In the subsequent step S932, setting processing of a special view display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L, 43R is performed. The special view display timer is referred to when it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variation display) is output to special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output process of the next normal process based on the setting of such a special view display timer. Switching display (variation display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that receives the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S932, the variable display setting process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the random number counter C1 of the steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special change suspension area, the process of judging the steps S505 and 513, and the variable display setting In the process, the process of step S901 to S903, S922, and S925, which determines the success or failure based on the success or failure flag and the small hit flag, and the situation at that time, constitutes a success or failure lottery.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the determination in step S802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, and the special view display timer subtraction process is performed. Every time this process is performed, the value of the special view display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special view display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and the value of the special view display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special view display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and the present process ends. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R. As a result, switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the flag for displaying the special view is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting content of the stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, out-of-order, and the like. Further, a control signal to the effect that stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed is also output to the sub control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably achieved. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub control device 262 by the symbol command and the change pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again There is no need to add Moreover, although it becomes repetition, it is a display which mainly uses the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42 becomes an auxiliary thing (for effect) to the last There is.

  Subsequently, in step S816, discrimination information setting processing for measuring the initial setting of the hit state and the period of the time shortening mode is performed, and then the present processing ends. Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the 16RS flag is set to ON.

  If the determination in step S1002 is affirmative, in step S1003, the number-of-rounds counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (number of opening of the variable winning device 32) is set to "16". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, "8" is set in the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1007, for example, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds is used for the special variable timer used for the control in the hit state (the opening and closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set Subsequently, in step S1008, the winning counter for counting the number of gaming balls entered into the first and second variable winning prize devices 32a and 32b is eight, which is the maximum number of balls entering per round. Set "8" shown. The value of the winning counter is the first and second count switches 223a whether or not the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have entered the ball in the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. And 223b, and if it is determined that the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have entered the ball, one is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub controller 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information of the hit type and the like, and the sub controller 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1009, the present process ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot state effects such as promotion of the jackpot type of appearance (for example, when even Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, winning in "8RS" or "16RS" in the jackpot state immediately after In addition, it is possible to teach that has been done, or when an odd number of eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, to teach that "16 RS" has been won during the big hit state immediately after). .

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is referred to, and it is determined whether the small hitting determination flag is set to on.

  If the determination in step S1010 is affirmative (small hit) or if the determination in step S1004 is affirmative ("2 RS" or "2 RN"), the round number counter is "2" in step S1011. Set After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1013, for example, a value "5000" corresponding to the opening period of 2 seconds is set to the special variable timer, and in step S1014, "8" is set to the winning counter. In step S1015, the opening Set the command. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If neither the jackpot nor the jackpot is determined and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not "12" is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not it is. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S1016 is affirmative, in step S1017, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although this will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of "8 RN", "2 RN 30", "2 RN 60", "2 RN 90", the fluctuation display corresponding to the time shortening mode period for the fluctuation number counter The number of times is set, and 1 is subtracted in step S1010 each time the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once.

  In the following step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the time reduction mode period is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S1018 is affirmative, in step S1019, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate that the mode is the normal mode. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1019, in the step S1020, the time short end command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the process of performing the initial setting of the small hitting state and the process of performing the initial setting of the large hitting states of 2RS and 2RN are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the jackpot state and the small hitting state are other than the big hit state by determining whether the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, the present processing ends. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state or the small-jack state, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area in the above-described discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the large hit state or the small hit state is in progress (if any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 Then, it is determined whether or not the first change flag is turned on in the execution area of the special change reserve area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and the value of the special variable timer is decremented by one. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “2000” or “500” is set to the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In the following step S1204, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1204, it is determined in step S 1205 whether “1” is set in the hit situation storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1206. In the following step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. Here, one of “16 RS”, “8 RS”, and “8 RN” which is a jackpot having a jackpot that can be awarded when winning in a lottery for winning or not being performed triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a. It is determined whether there is any (other than "2 RS").

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S1207, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer in step S1209. Set

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process is performed to open the first variable winning device 32a, and in step S1211, a round for conveying information to the effect that the round is to be started to the sub control device 262 Set the command. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set for the hit situation storage area when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are ended and the ending period is started. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot or small hit state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1213.

  In the following step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1218, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

  After step S 1217 or step S 1218, “8” is set to the winning counter in step S 1219. Furthermore, in step S1220, processing for closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect of starting an interval to the sub control device 262 is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) for maintaining the open or closed state of the first variable winning device 32a remains, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is "0". In the winning counter, "8" which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of winnings per round is set at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state and the start of the interval. Then, each time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a, one is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if the end trigger of the round has come without waiting for the round setting period to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round is immediately ended at that time even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  In addition, if the positive determination is made in step S1214, that is, if all the rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are digested, the process proceeds to step S1223, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1225, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, in step S1226, a value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer.

  After step S 1225 or step S 1226, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S 1227. When the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the positive determination in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. Then, if the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination is made suddenly in step S1222, and the ending period is completed. Can not. Therefore, the ending period is completed by inserting a temporary numerical value ("7" in this example) other than "0" into the winning counter in step S1227. Of course, it may be configured to complete the ending period in another way.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, processing is made to close the first variable winning device 32a, and in the subsequent step S1229, an ending command is sent to the sub control device 262 to convey information to start ending. . Thereafter, the process ends.

  Further, when the determination in step S1212 is affirmative, that is, when the ending period ends and the time to end the jackpot state comes, the process proceeds to step S1230 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the fluctuation number counter are performed.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the small hitting determination flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 8 RN flag is set on.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1403, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state.

  In the following step S1404, "90" is set to the fluctuation number counter. Note that with the fluctuation count counter, when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started, the fluctuation display for the specified number of times set as the time reduction mode period is completed. To understand what happened. After step S1404, the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1405, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 2RN 90 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403 as in the case where the 8 RN flag is set to on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether the 2RN 60 flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, and "60" is set in the variation count counter in step S1408, after which this process ends. .

  Furthermore, when the negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether the 2RN 30 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, "12" is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, and "30" is set in the variation count counter in step S1411, and this process is ended. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. Thereby, the latent mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the positive variation mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 22, after step S 1230, “0” is set in step S 1231 to indicate that the jackpot state and the small hit state are not for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to convey information indicating that the big hit state or the small hit state is ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the game mode set in the end setting process, the number information of the fluctuation number counter, and the like.

  The second variable winning device control process in step S207 of the normal processing (see FIG. 10) is basically the target of the opening / closing control for the first variable winning device control process is the second variable winning device 32b, It is executed when the second change flag is set to ON, and the only difference is in determining whether it is 16 RS or 8 RS when determining whether or not the ball is a jackpot with a big hit, so the description thereof is omitted. Do.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the flag in the common view display, which indicates whether the variable display is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is on. In addition, when the flag in the common drawing display is on, it is considered that the variable display is in progress in the normal symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, when the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variable display of normal symbols is held, the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

  In the following step S2104, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the normal variation suspension area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas reserved in the normal change suspension area to the execution area side, and the first area reserved → the execution area, the second area reserved → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area.

  After that, in step S2105, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is set, and the common drawing fluctuation setting processing for starting is executed.

  Here, the common drawing fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S 2301, a common-diagram displaying flag indicating that variation display of an ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is being set is turned on. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether it is a state other than the jackpot state or the small hit state now. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, in step S2303, whether the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the high ball-in state (time shortening mode or definite variation mode).

  If the affirmative determination is made in step S 2303, the variation display time of the normal symbol is displayed for the common view display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variation display performed in the normal symbol display device 41 in step S 2304 Set "100" to make it 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal variation reserving area is "0". In the high entry status, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1 to 99".

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the player wins the entry support lottery whether or not the second start-up winning device 33b is in the open state, then in step S2306 that the entry support lottery is won. Set the ball entry support flag shown on. After step S2306 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the present process ends.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if it is in the big hit state, the small hit state, or the low ball entry state, in step S2307, a normal symbol for the common view display timer Set "2000" to change the display time to 8 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reserving area is "1". In the low pitch state, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if a winning support lottery is won, then in step S2309, a entering support flag indicating that the winning support lottery is won is set on. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, the present process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present process ends. It should be noted that, when the control signal indicating that the variable display is to be started is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the common drawing variation setting processing, the normal symbol display device At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "o" or "x" as an ordinary symbol, and if "o" is displayed, "x" or "x" If it is, the display is switched (varied) to “o”.

  If YES at step S2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying variable, the process proceeds to step S2106, and processing for subtracting a common view display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the common view display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the common view display timer is “0”, that is, whether the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the common drawing display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the common drawing stop display setting for performing the stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the common view stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. That is, in the case of winning (when the ball support flag is set to ON), the symbol "○" (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lighted for only a few seconds) and when it is out, "x" Stop display the symbol.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the common drawing determination information setting process is performed, and the process ends. Here, the common drawing determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second startup winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

  Incidentally, based on the on / off state of the normal variable flag, various control signals are outputted to the second start winning device 33b in the external output process of the next normal process. When the normal variable flag is on, a control signal indicating that the start winning shutter 405 is driven to open the special winning opening is output to the second start winning device 33b, and the second start winning device 33b is opened. . On the other hand, when the normal variable flag is off, a control signal indicating that the start winning shutter 405 is driven in the reverse direction to the second starting winning device 33 b to close the special winning opening is output, and the second starting winning device 33 b Is closed.

  In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S 2403, the open time of the second start winning device 33 b is 4 for the ordinary variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33 b in step S 2404. Set "1000" to be seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times, with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, the present process ends.

  Also, in the case of a negative determination in step S 2403, that is, in the case of a low ball entry state, in step S 2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is 0.4 seconds for the ordinary variable timer. Set "100". In the subsequent step S2407, "1" is set in the opening number counter so as to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, the present process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and when it is "x", the display is switched to "o". Thereby, the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control processing, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the start winning prize apparatus control process of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in step S2202 whether a general drawing display flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, that is, although it has been determined that the second start-up winning device 33b is in the open state, variation display of the corresponding normal symbol is still performed, and the timing is the open state. If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in step S2202 is negative, in step S2203, the value of the normal variable timer is decremented by one. In the following step S2204, it is determined whether the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the second startup winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2205 whether or not the value of the ordinary variable timer is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S2205, that is, if the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b defined in advance is not yet elapsed, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and the normal variable flag is turned off. In the subsequent step S2207, the value of the release number counter is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether the value of the release number counter is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability change mode or the time shortening mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based thereon If there is the remaining number of times, a value (for example, "100") corresponding to the interval time is set to the normally variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, the process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not elapsed yet, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value ("1000" in this example) corresponding to the open time is set in the normal variable timer in step S2213. Then, the process ends.

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily put on standby, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from main controller 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step S3002 to store that the command has been transmitted from main controller 261. The command reception flag is turned on to complete the present reception interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer for storing the next received command in the next storage area Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed in the interrupt process which is executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, whether or not the command is received is confirmed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and transition to command determination processing may be made if a command is not received. In such a case, by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon reset upon power-on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process is performed in response to power on. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the occurrence information of the power-off is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the power-off It is determined whether or not the backup is effective. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 513. In addition, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  When the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106 or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process for initializing the RAM 513 is performed after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit an interrupt.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing upon power recovery (power failure recovery) Process). That is, the stack pointer before power-off is restored in step S3109, the power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag for permitting payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, CPU peripheral devices are initialized. In step S3113, the use register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power is shut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process at the time of the power-off. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is inhibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 513.

  Since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the completion of the process performed at the time of power-on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is compared with the case where each process is in progress. Less and easier to remember. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) activated.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above is received.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control device 261, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of step S3302 to step S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether it is a payout return command or not, and in step S3306, it is a prize ball command Whether or not it is determined.

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether the payout permission flag has already been turned on, and if the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the winning balls is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized coincide with each other. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the timing of initialization being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command can not be performed, etc. Can prevent the occurrence of negative effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the winning balls can be set reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3307 that the payout permission flag has been turned on, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized in the state where the payout permission flag is set. The payout initialization command is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout permission flag is not turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognizes it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and the setting of the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) are executed while the payout permission flag is on, the payout ball will not be paid out if it remains, etc. Although a bad effect is caused to give a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent giving a loss to the player.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutoff. In order to permit payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power failure, the payout of the winning balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. In order to permit the payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And memorize. Since the payout of the winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls is performed based on the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the winning ball command is a payout instructing command instructing the payout of the winning balls. . Further, when the award ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the award balls can be paid out earlier than the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (NO at step S3304) nor a payout return command (NO at step S3305), and if it is not a winning ball command (NO at step S3306), The command determination processing is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing ends. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being performed before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S3204 and the state recovery operation start is determined. Execute recovery operation. By this processing, for example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray full is reached, the lower tray full condition setting is executed, and the lower tray full run out. , Set the lower plate full release state. Also, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball absent state (ball out state) or the tank sphere absent state (ball present state) is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, the tank sphere absence state is made special, the setting of the tank sphere absence state is executed, and the tank ball absence state is absent, the tank sphere no release state Execute the setting.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of winning balls and rental balls is executed. In more detail, in step S3208, the payout number setting process is performed, in step S3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed, and in step S3210, a motor drive process is performed.

  In step S3211, the state recovery switch 321 is checked, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal processing on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

  Next, normal processing of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed to store information on the prior command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553. Note that, as described above, the advance command indicates information indicating which of the upper winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is the variable display triggered by entering the ball, and indicates whether it is the fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot. It includes information, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  The holding information storage area is, similarly to the special variation holding area of the main control device 261, a first holding information storage area and a second holding information storage area provided with four holding areas (the first holding first area to the fourth holding area), respectively. , And one execution area. In the first hold information storage area, according to the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special change hold area), information of whether or not the big hit, big hit type, small hit or not The information as to whether or not the information and the information (the fluctuation information) on the fluctuation display such as the reach type are stored in time series. Further, in the second hold information storage area, change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the prior command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting the configuration, variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a, and a second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Can store four pieces of fluctuation information regarding. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special variation reserve areas of the main controller 261 but also the variation information stored in the reserve area can be grasped by the sub controller 262 .

  The on-hold information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether the advance command corresponds to entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) in step S4102 Determine if it is not. If the negative determination is made here, that is, if the advance command corresponds to the entry of the first start winning device 33a (the variation information stored in the first special variation suspension area), in step S4103 The first change suspension counter Nd for counting the number of suspension of the fluctuation information stored in the first suspension information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the following step S4104, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the information on jackpot type, the information on whether or not the small hit, the information on reach type, etc. of the vacant reserve area of the first reserve information storage area I will memorize in the first area.

  In the subsequent step S4105, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the effect display related to each other is intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (a so-called "continuous notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice, and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. In the area, the change information is stored in the reserve area newly stored in step S4104.

  The continuous announcement counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous advance notice counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer).

  The notice type counter is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9 and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  Then, when the fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the notice information storage process, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, in each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is derived is provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table, which is referred to when deciding whether to give a continuous notice, and a notice table, which is considered when deciding the form of the continuous notice. A plurality of notice success judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the notice success judgment table and notice table to be referred are selected according to the fluctuation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first holding lamps 46a) is lit. It will be in the state. The first holding lamp 46 a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In the subsequent step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice, and then the process ends.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107, when the value of the first variation hold counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, With reference to the notice success / failure determination table respectively corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, and game mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, a notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. Refer to to decide whether to execute continuous notice. In addition, among the pending areas of the first pending information storage area, the continuous advance notice flag of all the pending areas in which the variation information is stored is turned on. However, the continuous advance flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the advance command corresponds to entering the second starting winning apparatus 33b (the variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area), The process advances to step S4108 to increment by one the second variation suspension counter Ne that counts the number of suspension of variation information that is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the small hit, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant holding area of the second holding information storage area. In the first area of In the subsequent step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold area where the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 of the second hold information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second storage lamps 46b in the extinguished state (for example, the leftmost one among the four second lamps 46b) is lit. I assume. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In the subsequent step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice, and the process ends. Incidentally, the continuous notice lottery process in step S4112 merely corresponds the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107 to entering the second start winning device 33b, and the description will be omitted.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when the negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, upper, middle, and lower used for setting of each outlying symbol of a large hit decorative symbol counter CO, an upper symbol display region, a middle symbol display region, and a lower symbol display region. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that the register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO There are nine (0 to 8) counter values prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 8 and to return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 8).

  Then, if the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is "AA11" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is to be stopped, based on a table (a table for correlating the counter value and the decoration symbol) not shown. For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner as to be “1” (Zoro eyes), and 1 “2” (Zoro eyes). The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the large hit decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the large hit decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. You may

  In addition, if the symbol command is "AA12" indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1 if it is "2" (the zoro eyes), if it is 2 to 4. Determine the combination of the jackpot symbols, such as “4” (Zoro eyes), 5 or 6 “6” (Zoro eyes), 7 or 8 “8” (Zoro eyes), etc. .

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stop symbols for the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is out of the process. Since one of nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol of the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol of the middle symbol display region is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol of the lower pattern display region is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted and the current value is determined . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 back and forth, the reach pattern buffer other than the back and forth, and complete It is stored in any of the out-of-patterns.

  Here, the process of updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process. Therefore, when the lower figure symbol counter CR is updated in the previous updating process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. Then, if it is the time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the upper symbol counter CL is updated. If the middle symbol counter CM is updated (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the middle symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the figure counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the figure counter CR is updated. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, The calculation result is taken as the current value of the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the update process of CL, CM and CR, the upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap There is no. Thus, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is performed three times.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol of the upper symbol display area and the symbol of the lower pattern display region are the same) If it is determined that it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of big hit symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same) Determine if When an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is ended without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and back out symbols. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, the combination of the symbol counter CL, CM, CR at that time The outreach reach symbol is stored in the buffer, and this processing is ended. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of other symbols (reach other than back and forth deviation) (S4008 is NO), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the symbol counter CL, CM, CR combination at that time Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth deviation of the RAM 553 and the present process is ended.

  Also, if it is a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the out symbol counter CL, CM, CR is out of combination and the symbol (completely out symbol) is combined, so in step S4011 The combination of the out-of-time pattern counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the completely out-of-pattern buffer of the RAM 553 and this processing is completed.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether a change pattern command has been received (whether a change pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4201 is affirmative, in step S4202, it is determined whether the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is larger than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored pending, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first fluctuation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second changeable display is digested prior to the first changeable display, and when the second changeable display is reserved and stored, the first changeable display is digested. There is nothing to do. That is, when the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is reserved and stored in the second holding information storage area, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display is not sent. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is larger than “0”, so that the change pattern command indicates the first change display and the second change display. It is determined which of the fluctuation information of Of course, the fluctuation pattern command is provided with information as to which fluctuation information corresponding to the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, and based on the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern command is subjected to the first fluctuation display and It may be determined which fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display has.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the first hold information storage area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the first pending information storage area toward the execution area, ie, the first pending area The data in each area is shifted in the order of execution area, holding second area, holding first area, holding third area, holding second area, holding fourth area, and holding third area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the lighting state (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first holding lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  Further, if the determination in step S4202 is affirmative, that is, if at least one piece of change information of the second change display is stored pending, in step S4206, the value of the second change suspension counter Ne is decremented by one.

  In the following step S4207, processing for shifting data stored in the second hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage area toward the execution area, and the first pending area → the execution area, the second pending Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area are indicated by variable display corresponding to the data. It will be shifted to a common execution area when being

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second storage lamps 46b in the lighting state (for example, the rightmost one of the second storage lamps 46b that are on) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for continuous notice. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (refer to the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Because this process is not performed, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not, in the case of a jackpot what type is determined, if not a jackpot, a reach type is discriminated on the basis of the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a predetermined timing for the corresponding variable display. After step S4209, the present process ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display, the first variation is performed when a plurality of first variation displays are notified in advance. If the second start-up winning device 33b is entered during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may be interrupted between the plurality of first variable displays, and the continuous advance notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous advance notice can be derived also at the time of the normal change display when the continuous advance notice is not performed (the effect can be derived for the single change display) Is used. For this reason, even if continuous notice is interrupted, no sense of incongruity occurs.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol and the like to determine the display pattern and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45.

  The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 42. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, the symbol is displayed based on the cooperation of sub control device 262 and display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

  In addition, when the variable display is started, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (refer to the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation based on the change information of the change pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, determine the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice, or perform display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. To Furthermore, in the display setting process of the step S3907, a process (performing display process) of performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit is also performed, which will be described later.

  In the lamp setting process of step S3908, in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electric decoration is set.

  In the sound setting process of step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. When a command relating to voice is transmitted from the main control device 261, such as notification of error occurrence, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3909.

  In step S3910, control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed when predetermined time elapses in a state where fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed; other settings, etc.) Perform the processing of

  At step 3911, an external output process of transmitting control signals to the respective devices based on the setting contents at steps S 3905 to 3910 is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  After the processes of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec are executed, or when the negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and generation information of power-off is stored in RAM 553 or not. Determine if Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that occurrence information of the power-off is stored, the power-off process is executed in step S3914. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is inhibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased. After execution of the power-off process, the process is looped endlessly.

  Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit state or the small hit state from the main control device 261 is received. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, in step S4702, the round grasping counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is “16” if it is “16 RS” based on the information included in the opening command. Set “8 RS”, “8” if “8 RN”, “2 RS”, “2 RN”, “2” if “small hit”.

  After that, in step S4703, if there is a big drop out ball, setting of opening effect for 8 seconds (image of decoration symbol display device 42, sound of speaker SP, setting of lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and the various presentation modes in the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is referred to by referring to the table. You will select and have it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, whether or not an interval command has been received is determined in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, then in step S4705, if a jackpot with a large hit is made, effects are set for a maximum of 30 seconds in a round, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if there is a big drop out in step S4708, effects are set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if it is a big hit with a popped out in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot other than a jackpot with a jackpot or a small jack, the opening period (2 seconds), the round period (0.4 seconds), the interval period (1 second), and the ending period ( Instead of setting the effects by dividing them into each period such as one second), it is set to perform effects (announcements etc.) throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not the hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and the setting is made to be the mode of the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. Thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, according to the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the start winning shutter 405 for opening and closing the start winning opening 402, and the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. In some cases, the start winning opening 402 is closed, and the game ball can not enter the starting winning opening 402. Therefore, conventionally, the gaming ball whose entry to the start winning opening 402 is refused by the start winning shutter 405 is directly downstream of the second starting winning device 33b without entering the start winning opening 402. It will flow down. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b is provided with the introduction path 412 and the introduction path 412 to which the game ball whose entry to the start winning opening 402 is rejected by the start winning shutter 405 is guided. A re-entry path 414 for guiding the guided gaming ball to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is provided, and even if entry to the starting winning opening 402 is denied once, later, to the starting winning opening 402 again. It is configured to be able to try to hit the ball.

  Therefore, in the high entering state in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode, the starting winning opening 402 is entered among the game balls hit to aim at entering the starting winning opening 402 of the second starting winning device 33b. The number of gaming balls to be balled, and the number of gaming balls that are restricted by the start winning shutter 405 and excluded from the discharge opening 411 to the outside of the second starting winning device 33b without entering the start winning opening 402 In proportion, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the starting winning opening 402 can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the high ball entry state, almost all of the right-handed game balls are started since the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the open position almost all the time (if continuing to hit the right). It is designed to enter the winning opening 402.

  In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the start winning opening 402 can be efficiently entered into the starting winning opening 402, and the ball launched for aiming at the start winning opening 402 enters the ball. It is possible to reduce the amount of balls that do not reach as much as possible, and to prevent the situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls to enter the start winning hole 402. As a result, the burden on the player is reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game (in this example, there is only one payout for entering the start winning opening 402). Regardless, in the high ball entry state, it is possible to play the game without substantially reducing the number of game balls on hand) and by efficiently entering the game balls into the start winning opening 402, it is possible to play the game. It is possible to make it progress with good vigor (it is possible to keep the change display without stopping and to increase the tempo of the change display).

  In general, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open position, the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the second start winning device 33b, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the second It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the starting winning opening 402 by performing a technical operation to refrain from launching the gaming balls at such timing as reaching the starting winning device 33b. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such operations, and even if the number of game balls to the second start winning device @ is the same per predetermined time, There is a concern that a difference may occur in the number of game balls emitted, and in the long run, a relatively large difference may occur in the total number of game balls obtained by the player. Furthermore, in the development of the pachinko machine 10, etc., the design is made based on the actual situation in the game hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of game balls fired and the total number of game balls paid out The payout rate) is designed to include the amount of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, as the number of players who perform the above-mentioned technical operation is large, in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, the winning probability such as a winning lottery is lowered, various game balls are paid out The game ball tends to reach the winning opening and reduce the possibility of entering the ball, which may increase the burden on the player who does not perform the technical operation. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the start winning opening 402 even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the second start winning device 33 b when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position. Since there is a possibility of balling, generation of waste balls that do not enter the start winning hole 402 is suppressed even if the game balls are kept firing. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second start winning device 33b, on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402, a guide stand 407 for guiding the gaming ball to the start winning opening 402 from a substantially fixed direction is provided. A game nail or character provided on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33 b is configured to guide the right-handed game ball to the guide stand 407. As a result, before the gaming ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402, the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball will be adjusted, and the moving direction and movement of the gaming ball entering the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 Irregularities in speed can be reduced. Therefore, when the start winning combination shutter 405 is in the closed position, the game ball whose entry into the start winning combination port 402 is rejected by the start winning combination shutter 405 is caused to enter the introduction path 412 and the reentry path 414, By providing the game ball with an opportunity to reach the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at a later timing, it is possible to further ensure the effect of improving the probability of entering the starting winning opening 402.

  Furthermore, since the start winning shutter 405 is configured to slide in the front-rear direction, it can be configured to enter the start winning opening 402 by the action of the gaming ball falling, and smooth to the starting winning opening 402 It is possible to realize the ball entry. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 on the top surface of the start winning shutter 405. That is, since the game ball can be guided to the introduction path 412 by the start-up winning shutter 405 when the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the movable type for guiding the game ball to the introduction path 412 It is not necessary to separately provide a member of the above, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, suppression of cost increase and the like can be achieved.

  In addition, for example, when opening the start winning combination opening 402 by rotating the start winning combination shutter extending forward and backward, the gaming ball thought to have entered the start winning combination opening 402 is launched outside the start winning combination shutter. It is possible to avoid situations such as being thrown away by Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the start winning combination shutter extending forward and backward is rotated downward to open the start winning combination port 402, a large number of gaming balls fall on the start winning combination shutter at one time and the start winning combination shutter opens. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the start winning opening 402 without being opened.

  In addition, although the start winning shutter 405 that extends in the front-rear direction when in the closed position and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball is likely to be relatively heavily loaded, as in the present embodiment, the start winning shutter 405 By setting the front end portion and the like of the lower surface to be supported by the opening peripheral edge of the start winning opening 402, it is possible to reduce the load on the root side of the start winning shutter 405, and the start winning shutter 405 has a root It is possible to prevent a situation in which the side is broken. In addition, the reinforcing rib 409 is provided on the lower surface side of the start winning shutter 405, the strength of the start winning shutter 405 is improved, and the start winning shutter 405 is prevented from being damaged when the game ball collides. can do.

  Also, in the big hit state and small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state, it is in the low entering state, and it is difficult to win the entry support lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol is long, entering the ball Even if the support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b (start winning shutter 405) is almost closed because most of the time for which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state is short, etc. It comes through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414. On the other hand, for example, when the second variable winning device 32b is on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device of the game ball by the game ball passing through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 The approach to 32b is delayed. In particular, in the reentry route of the game ball from the upper position of the start winning opening 402 through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again, even though the upper position of the start winning opening 402 Even if the re-entry route is crossed, the game balls are in contact on the start winning shutter 405 which is a closed position which is the upper position of the starting winning opening 402, and the residence time becomes longer, etc. The second variable winning device 32b may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the ball. In this respect, by disposing the second variable winning device 32b on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, it is possible to smoothly enter the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, the load on the start winning shutter 405 can be reduced by reducing the number of gaming balls entering the second start winning device 33 b (the start winning shutter 405 is prevented from entering the start winning opening 402). it can. In addition, it is possible to avoid crowding of the gaming balls in the second start-up winning device 33b during the jackpot state to prevent the flow from becoming bad, and it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize such bad appearance. .

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described below. In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is characterized, and will be described with reference to FIG. 41 and FIG. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  The second variable winning device 32b is provided on the front side of the mounting plate 431 attached to the front side of the game board 30, and on the front side of the mounting plate 431, and has a large winning opening 432 (see FIG. 42), a rectangular flat-shaped big winning shutter 434 as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the big winning opening 432, and a winning opening solenoid 435 (FIG. 42) for opening and closing the big winning shutter 434. See) and. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, the mounting plate 431 is formed with a communication hole 436 for allowing passage of gaming balls having entered the big winning opening 432, and is connected to the communication hole 436. There is provided a winning passage 437 for guiding the game board to the rear side (discharge passage portion 217) of the game board 30. The count switch 223 b is provided so as to detect the game ball passing through the winning aisle 437. Further, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening 432 corresponds to the specific winning opening.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 42, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b of this embodiment is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. When the special winning opening solenoid 435 is in the non-excitation state, the special winning shutter 434 protrudes toward the game area to close the special winning opening 432. On the other hand, when the special winning opening solenoid 435 is in the illustrated state, the special winning shutter 434 slides so as to be positioned rearward of the front surface of the mounting plate 431, and the special winning opening 432 is opened. ing.

  Also, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position where the second variable winning device 32b is closed, the big winning shutter 434 restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening 432, but Since the big winning shutter 434 of the embodiment extends back and forth, the restricted game ball is placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, at least the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Furthermore, the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 has no step at least in the left-right direction, and is a flat surface in this example. Therefore, winning of the big winning opening 432 is restricted by the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position, and the gaming ball placed on the top of the big winning shutter 434 is guided to the top of the big winning shutter 434 and moves leftward. It will be done.

  Also, when the big winning shutter 434 is brought to the open position with the gaming ball resting on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position, all gaming balls on the big winning shutter 434 at that time are below. It is designed to win a prize winning opening 432.

  The upper edge of the left wall of the ball support member 433 is at the same height as the left side of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 or at a lower position than the big winning shutter 434. The game ball that has reached the left side of the game is discharged to the left of the second variable winning device 32b. Furthermore, the upper edge portion (dropping prevention means) of the front wall portion of the ball receiving member 433 is positioned above the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is a big winning shutter It is not located forward of 434.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the gaming ball is guided to the right end portion side of the second variable winning device 32b by the game nails and prizes located on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b. It has become so. That is, the gaming ball having moved to a position immediately above the second variable winning device 32b falls to the right, which is the upstream side portion of the big winning shutter 434 that leans to the lower left when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. It is configured to Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32 b is configured to roll from the right to the left of the big winning shutter 434.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively gentle (for example, 1 degree to 9 degrees), and the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively slowly moved to the left. Become. Furthermore, the width of the entrance of the big winning opening 432 of this embodiment is configured as large as possible (for example, 100 mm to 135 mm), and the gaming ball mounted on the top of the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position has a relatively long time The top of the big winning shutter 434 is placed on the top.

  Further, unlike the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment has a shape called a general electronic tulip. That is, a pair of wing members 438 are provided adjacent to the left and right sides of the start winning opening where the game ball can enter. In the present embodiment, when the game nail is disposed immediately above the starting winning opening of the second start winning device 33b and the wing member 438 is in the vertically extending extended position, There is no room for the game ball to pass between the blade member 438 and the wing member 438) and the starting winning opening is closed, and it is impossible to enter the starting winning opening. On the other hand, the game ball can enter the starting winning opening by displacing the wing member 438 to the open position opening outward.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the second start winning device 33b is disposed upstream of the game area (lower right portion area) than the second start winning device 33b. When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, most of the game balls hit to the right enter the second start winning device 33b. In addition, when the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state, the game ball moving to the downstream side of the second start winning device 33b without entering the second start winning device 33b is the second variable winning device 32b. The arrangement (such as the arrangement of the game nails disposed in the game area and the relative positional relationship between the second start winning device 33b and the second variable winning device 32b) is preferred. In the present embodiment, (the special winning opening of the second variable winning device 32b) constitutes a specific winning opening, and the special winning shutter 434 constitutes an opening / closing member and a time difference passing opportunity giving means.

  As described in detail above, according to the second embodiment, when the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32 b is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32 b is the big winning shutter 434. As a result, the winning of the special winning opening 432 is restricted, and the upper surface of the special winning shutter 434 is rolled as it is. When the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the gaming ball rolling on the big winning shutter 434 enters the big winning opening 432. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to wait for the timing when the big winning shutter 434 is next to the open position while being able to enter the big winning opening 432. In particular, in the present embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434, that is, the width in the lateral direction which is the moving direction of the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 is configured as long as possible, and the inclination is relatively gentle. The gaming ball guided to the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is configured to stay on the upper face of the big winning shutter 434 as long as possible if the big winning shutter 434 is not in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the case where the game ball hit to the right during the jackpot state in which the second variable prize device 32b is opened is discharged from the out port 36 without entering the big prize port 432, the big prize The game balls launched into the game area to enter the mouth 432 can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 432.

  Further, even if the opening time of the big winning shutter 434 is relatively short, the big winning opening 432 can be made to enter for the game balls placed on the big winning shutter 434. That is, when the big winning shutter 434 is closed, the gaming ball can be placed on the big winning shutter 434, and the short winning opening of the big winning shutter 434 can cause all of them to enter the big winning opening 432. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined plurality of game balls without increasing the total opening time of the big winning shutter 434. For example, the game balls are stored on the big winning shutter 434 during the interval of the jackpot state, and the big winning shutter 434 is opened at the same time as the start of the round to make the playing balls enter the big winning opening 432 at once. An end-of-round condition (e.g., 8 wins) may be achieved). For this reason, improvement of time efficiency etc. can be aimed at.

  In addition, the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position closing the big winning opening 432 of the second variable winning device 32b extends forward and backward, and when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the gaming ball is downward The large winning opening 432 is made to win by moving it. Therefore, for example, the action and reaction of the game ball until the game ball is made to win the big winning hole 432 is better than the case where the big winning shutter extends up and down and the game ball is moved backward to make the winning hole It gets faster. Therefore, by setting the large winning shutter 434 in the closed position to the open position, the large winning hole 432 can be relatively quickly made to win the gaming ball that has restricted the winning in the large winning opening 432 by the large winning shutter 434 Can.

  In addition, the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b is inclined to the lower left by the game nails, characters and the like disposed on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, on the upstream right side of the big winning shutter 434 It is supposed to be guided to the site of As a result, the above-described effect of causing the gaming ball to stay on the big winning shutter 434 as long as possible is more reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state has to support the lower surface side of the gaming ball, and the burden of receiving the falling gaming ball is large. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the second variable winning device 32b downstream of the second starting winning device 33b, the second variable winning device 32b can enter the second starting winning device 33b. The number of game balls moving toward can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the big winning shutter 434 can be reduced.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 43, focusing on the second start-up winning device 33b which is a characteristic part. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  The second variable winning device 32b of the third embodiment is basically the same as the second variable winning device 32b of the first embodiment, and includes a base plate 401 and a start winning opening 402 (not shown in FIG. 43), A guide stand 407 and a start winning shutter 405 are provided. However, the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 are omitted, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball once dropped onto the start winning shutter 405 is discharged to the discharge opening 411 as it is. It is supposed to be.

  Now, in the present embodiment, the guide plate 407 is provided with a switching plate 451 that changes state to an open state that allows passage of the gaming ball to the start winning hole 402 side and a closed state that restricts passage. A rotating shaft 452 is provided on one long side of the switching plate 451, and the rotating shaft 452 is provided to extend in the front and back direction at a position near the leading edge of the guide stand 407. A motor 453 (or another driving means) is connected to the rear surface side of the base plate 401 of the rotating shaft 452.

  The switching plate 451 of the present embodiment is in the closed state during the variation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 41 and is in the open state in the state of the stop display. That is, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position during the variable display of the normal symbol, even if the gaming ball moves to the upper position of the start winning mouth 402, the start winning hole 402 is won Because it is impossible, the game ball is blocked on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402. And, when it is elected in the ball entry support lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the switching board 451 is put in the open state, so that the game ball blocked by the switching board 451 is , And will enter the opening start winning opening 402. When the player does not win in the entry support lottery, of course, the start winning shutter 405 is not opened, and therefore, it is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  Further, an accommodation recess 455 is formed adjacent to the rear of the guide stand 407 in the second start winning device 33b. That is, when the number of gaming balls blocked by the switching plate 451 in the closed state exceeds a predetermined amount, the gaming balls are guided to the housing recess 455. The bottom surface of the housing recess 455 is slightly inclined downward toward the guide stand 407. Further, in the present embodiment, the switching plate 451 constitutes a time difference passing opportunity giving means (stopper).

  As described above in detail, according to the third embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33b is in the closed position, the gaming ball that has reached the guide stand 407 moves the guide stand 407 as it is. Even if it jumps out to the upper position of the start winning opening 402, it is not possible to win a start winning opening 402 by being blocked by the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position. In such a case, according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball is not positioned at the upper position of the start winning opening 402 at the normal timing, but the gaming ball is positioned at the upper position of the starting winning opening 402. By delaying the arrival timing, the gaming ball reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 as much as possible when the start winning shutter 405 is not in the closed position, that is, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the open state. It can be configured. In particular, in the present embodiment, at the timing of the stop display of the variation display of the normal symbol, the switching plate 451 holding the gaming ball by the guide stand 407 is opened to allow the gaming ball to flow down, and the height is high. In the ball entering mode, at this timing, the start-up winning shutter 405 is in the substantially open position, and the gaming ball that has been blocked is almost entering the start-winning hole 402. Therefore, the operation and effect of making the starting winning opening 402 efficiently enter the game ball launched into the game area in order to cause the starting winning opening 402 to enter can be reliably achieved.

  Further, a modification of the third embodiment will be described here with reference to FIG. That is, the detour passage 456 is provided adjacent to the back side of the guide stand 407 in the second start-up winning device 33b in the present embodiment. The bypass passage 456 has an inlet 457 and an outlet 458 which are respectively connected to the guide stand 407, and the inlet 457 is connected to a portion on the upstream side of the guide stand 407 than the outlet 458.

  Furthermore, although the switching plate 459 is provided also in this embodiment, the rotation shaft 460 extends vertically in the vicinity of the boundary between the inlet 457 and the outlet 458 of the bypass passage 456 in this embodiment. It is provided in an open state where it guides the gaming ball moving the guide platform 407 to the downstream side of the guide platform 407 as it is, and a closed state where it guides the gaming ball moving the guide platform 407 to the entrance 457 of the bypass passage 456 It is configured to be changeable. When the switching plate 459 is in the open state, the gaming balls dropped to the upstream side of the guide stand 407 move straight down the guide stand 407 and move to the upper position of the start winning opening 402.

  On the other hand, when the switching plate 459 is in the closed state, the gaming ball dropped to the upstream side of the guide platform 407 passes from the bypass platform 456 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 from the guide platform 407. It will move. That is, the time from when the game ball falls to the guide stand 407 until it reaches the upper position of the start winning opening 402 is delayed. Also in this example, the switching plate 459 is closed during the normal symbol variation display of the normal symbol display device 41, and is open in the stop display condition. In this embodiment, the switching plate 459 and the bypass passage 456 constitute a time difference passing opportunity giving means, and the switching plate 459 constitutes a course changing means.

  As described above, also in the present embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second start winning device 33 b is in the closed position, the timing is slightly shifted (slightly delayed) to start the game ball. By configuring to reach the upper position of 402, the possibility of winning the game ball in the start winning opening 402 can be enhanced.

Fourth Embodiment
The fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55, focusing on the second start-up winning device 33b which is a characteristic part. The basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made using the same member names and member numbers.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration other than the second start winning device 33b is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the arrangement of the second start winning device 33b is also the same as that of the first embodiment. The winning device 33b is disposed on the downstream side of the game area from the second variable winning device 32b.

  As shown in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc., the second start winning device 33b includes a base plate 471 attached to the game board 30, and a first start win as a first specified win and a second specified win. , A second shutter as a first opening and closing member for opening and closing the first starting winning opening 472, and a second shutter as a second opening and closing member for opening and closing the second startup winning opening 473 It has 475 and. Furthermore, the start winning switch 224b is provided corresponding to each of the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, and in the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 are provided. No matter which prize is won, the same treatment is performed as if there was a prize in the second start-up winning device 33b (so that the second variable display is held).

  Further, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are configured to be slidable back and forth, and are in a closed position where they project into the game area and close the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 (FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.) and an open position (see FIG. 49, FIG. 51 etc.) for leaving the game area and opening the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 There is. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are integrated and operated by one solenoid 476 (the closed position of FIG. 52; Can be displaced to the open position). Thereby, the opening and closing operation of the first shutter 474 and the opening and closing operation of the second shutter 475 are configured to be exactly the same, and one of the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 is opened. It is configured such that there is no situation where one is closed. Also in the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are set to the open position when the player wins in the entry support lottery (opening and closing lottery) performed by the main controller 261 (opening and closing lottery means). It has become. Alternatively, the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 may be individually provided, and each may be operated by a separately provided solenoid.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the first starting winning opening 472 is located to the right and above the second starting winning opening 473. Further, in the present embodiment, the second start winning device 33 b includes a communication passage 477 provided between the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473. The connecting passage 477 inclines downward to the left while meandering back and forth. The upper surfaces of the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 are also inclined downward to the left. In this embodiment, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position when the gaming ball moves to the upper position of the first start winning opening 472, the winning of the first starting winning opening 472 of the gaming ball is the first While being regulated by the one shutter 474, the gaming ball is guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the draft communication passage 477.

  The game ball entering the communication passage 477 is guided to the upper position of the second start winning opening 473 while meandering along the communication passage 477. At this time, if the second shutter 475 is in the open position, the gaming ball wins the second start winning opening 473. On the other hand, when the second shutter 475 is in the closed position, the game ball is restricted by the second shutter 475 from winning in the second start winning opening 473, and is guided leftward by the upper surface of the second shutter 475, It will be discharged to the outside of the second start winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 474 and the communication passage 477 constitute a ball entry opportunity giving means. Further, in the present embodiment, the communication passage 477 corresponds to the second specified entering route.

  Incidentally, the communication passage 477 meandering back and forth in the present embodiment receives the gaming ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 at the front position of the base plate 471, and then places the gaming ball at the rear position of the base plate 471. After moving it to the front position of the base plate 471 after moving it to the front position of the base plate 471, and moving the gaming ball to the rear position of the base plate 471 again, the second start winning opening 473 in front of the base plate 471. The game ball is guided to the upper position.

  In addition, a roof member 478 is provided which closes the upper side of the communication passage 477, and the game ball can not enter the communication passage 477 from the middle. Furthermore, the roof member 478 extends to the upper position of the second start winning opening 473, whereby basically, only the game ball via the communication passage 477 is awarded to the second start winning opening 473. It is configured to be impossible.

  On the right side of the first start winning opening 472 (first shutter 474), there is provided a receiving stand 479 which is connected to the upper surface of the first shutter 474 which is inclined downward to the left and is in the closed position. The game ball dropped to the receiving board 479 is guided to the first start winning opening 472 side. Further, at an upper position of the boundary between the first shutter 474 and the receiving table 479, a hook portion 481 extending forward from the base plate 471 is provided. The bowl portion 481 is configured such that the upper surface is inclined to the left and right so that the gaming ball does not stay on the upper surface.

  Further, although illustration is omitted, the game ball which has reached the second start winning device 33b is basically obtained by the game nail, the character or the like disposed on the upstream side of the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment. It is guided to the reception stand 479 on the right side of the heel portion 481 and the heel portion 481. Furthermore, a gap through which the game ball can pass is also formed between the hook portion 481 and the roof member 478, and the game ball may reach the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 through the gap. is there. In addition, as shown in FIG. 55, a first start winning opening 472, a second starting winning opening 473, a roof member 478, a receiving board 479, and a front wall portion 480 closing the front of the heel portion 481 are provided. The roof member 478, the receiving board 479, the ridge portion 481, and the front wall portion 480 are integrally formed of a transparent resin material.

  For example, in the roof member 478, the connecting passage 477 is connected to the first start winning opening 472 and above the part guiding the gaming ball guided by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 to the rear of the base plate 471. In the case of a configuration in which the gaming ball may fall on the upper surface of the region covering the upper surface, the upper surface of the region may be configured to be slightly inclined downward to the right.

  In addition, the second start winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment is provided with an assist winning opening 482 projecting forward from the base plate 471 at the upper right of the brim portion 481. When a game ball is detected by a detection switch (not shown) for counting the game balls entering the assist winning opening 482, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Due to the presence of the assist winning opening 482, the winning opening to be entered increases when the gaming ball is fired toward the right side area (right-handed). Therefore, in the time reduction mode, the game is performed substantially without reducing the number of game balls (even if the number of winning balls when entering the second starting winning device 33b is smaller than that of the first starting winning device 33a). It can be carried out. Furthermore, in the big hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened, more game balls are obtained (or the winning ball in the case of entering the ball is the first variable winning when the assist winning opening 482 is not present). Although it is less than the device 32a, it is possible to make up for it and make it possible to make up for it.

  In addition, a space through which the game ball can pass is formed between the assist winning opening 482 and the bowl portion 481. Most or all of the game balls flowing into the lower right area are guided to the upper position of the assist winning opening 482 by game nails or the like. Then, the gaming ball which has not entered the assist winning opening 482 is dropped and guided to the hook portion 481 and the receiving board 479, and moved to the upper position of the first start winning opening 472.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, when the first shutter 474 of the second start-up winning device 33b is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 is in the closed position. The game balls that can not be won in the first starting winning opening 472 are guided to the second starting winning opening 473. For this reason, the game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 will be given the opportunity to try to enter the second starting winning opening 473, the game ball is the second start winning device 33b ( The possibility of entering the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the second start winning device 33b, the number of gaming balls entering the second start winning device 33b and the number of the second start winning device 33b are reached. 2) The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the second starting winning device 33b can be increased in proportion to the number of gaming balls not entering the starting winning device 33b. As a result, the game balls launched into the game area to enter the second start winning device 33b can be efficiently entered into the second start winning device 33b, and the shot balls are shot at the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls that did not reach into the ball, and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to cause the second starting winning device 33b to enter the ball. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls enter the second start winning device 33b efficiently. Thus, it is possible to make the game progress slightly (do not reduce the holding balls, do not interrupt the variable display (play the game immediately so as to start changing after the stop display).

  Also in the present embodiment, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the game ball is started second Since there is a possibility of entering the winning device 33b, even if the game ball continues to be fired, the second start winning device 33b (the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473) is a waste ball that does not enter the ball Occurrence will be suppressed. Therefore, the difference between the gaming ball to be acquired between the player who performs the technical operation of measuring the timing for firing the gaming ball described in the first embodiment and the player who does not perform the technical operation is reduced. It can be (effectively eliminated). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  Further, the moving direction and moving speed of the game ball are adjusted by the reception board 479 and the hook 481 disposed further upstream than the first start winning opening 472 and further by the game nails and character objects. It is done. For this reason, it is possible to reduce irregularity in the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the upper position of the first start winning opening 472. Therefore, when the first shutter 474 is in the closed position, the first shutter 474 sends the gaming ball to the communication passage 477 to improve the probability of entering the second start winning opening 473. Can be made more secure.

  In addition, by sliding the first shutter 474 and the second shutter 475 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to enter the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 as the gaming ball falls. Above, for example, when closing the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 with a pivoting shutter, the gaming ball thought to have entered the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473, It is possible to prevent the situation where the camera is thrown up to the outside by being released to the shutter.

  Also, the gaming ball that has reached the upper position of the first start winning opening 472 is guided to the communication path 477 by the upper surface of the first shutter 474 in the closed position. Thus, when the first shutter 474 for opening and closing the first start winning opening 472 is in the closed position, the game ball can be guided to the communication passage 477 by the first shutter 474. There is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding to 477, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, and suppression of cost increase can be achieved.

  Furthermore, it is configured to be able to enter the second start winning opening 473 only when the gaming ball passes through the communication passage 477, and to the communication passage 477 when the gaming ball is guided by the first shutter 474. It is configured to be accessible only. That is, although there is a possibility that the game ball that could not enter the first start winning opening 472 enters the second start winning opening 473, the game ball that could not enter the second starting winning opening 473 is the first Since there is no possibility of entering the start winning opening 472, for example, when the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter directly also to the second starting winning opening 473 side without passing through the first shutter 474 etc. The possibility of the game ball entering the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 decreases since the case of one chance comes out instead of two chances). In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 472 is intended to be entered first, and if it is not possible, the order of entering the second starting winning opening 473 is to be adhered to Thus, the function and effect of improving the possibility of entering the second starting winning device 33b (the first starting winning port 472 and the second starting winning port 473) can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is disposed on the upstream side of the game area with respect to the second start winning device 33b. That is, regarding the second start winning device 33b of the present embodiment, it takes a relatively long time before the gaming ball enters the second start winning device 33b and is discharged. More specifically, the first shutter of the second start winning device 33b is rectified first with a game nail or character, etc., and further, the collar portion 481 and the receiving board 479 are also rectified, and the first shutter 474 in the closed position , Passing through the communication path 477 that meanders back and forth, and passing downstream while changing the course in the orthogonal direction on the second shutter 475 in the closed position, finally, the second start winning device The game ball is discharged from 33b. Therefore, when the second start winning device 33b is on the upstream side of the second variable winning device 32b, the game ball winning in the big hit state or small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened. There is a risk that the game will not go smoothly (in particular, almost all of the game balls passing the right game area as in this example (except the game balls for winning the second variable winning device 32b) are the second start winning device 33b In the case of the configuration in which the user is guided to the above, the problem and the like can be eliminated in the present embodiment. The second start winning device 33b of this example takes a longer time (long distance) than the linear connection between the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. Since the communication passage 477 for guiding the game balls from the first start winning device 33a side to the second start winning device 33b side is provided, such effects can be further achieved.

  In addition, in the big hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the number of gaming balls falling to the second start winning device 33b can be reduced, and the second receiving the falling gaming balls It is possible to reduce the load on the start winning device 33b (the hook 481, the reception board 479, the first shutter 474, etc.) and the risk of damage.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the first embodiment, from the upper position of the start winning hole 402 as a specific point, through the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414, the gaming ball is again brought to the upper position of the start winning hole 402 again. The rush route is configured to intersect at the upper position of the start winning opening 402 (corresponding to the left of the start winning shutter 405), but not to cross (do not pass through the same place again) You may In this case, the game ball jumping out of the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the start winning opening 402 and the game ball jumping out of the start winning opening 402 again via the re-entry path 414 collide with each other. It is possible to more reliably avoid the situation where the start winning hole 402 will not be won. For example, the game ball falls from the guide stand 407 to the left on the introduction path 412 side of the start winning shutter 405, and the game ball from the re-entry path 414 to the discharge opening 411 side of the start winning shutter 405 It may be configured to be derived to

  In the above embodiment, although the re-entry route crosses, since it is at the upper position of the start winning opening 402, both gaming balls hit each other even if the game balls collide at that position. It is likely to get into. Therefore, compared with the case where the re-entry route crosses at a position other than the upper position of the start winning opening 402, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game balls block the winning to the starting winning opening 402.

  (B) Further, in the first embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the top of the start winning shutter 405, the introduction path 412, and the reentry path 414 are passed, and only the start winning opening 402 is performed again. The game ball may be configured to be able to access the upper position of the start winning opening 402 three times or more. For example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the start winning hole 402 and the start winning shutter 405 are formed in a step-like shape. That is, the start-up winning shutter 405 includes a connecting plate 491 extending vertically, an upper closing plate 492 extending leftward from the upper side of the connecting plate 491, and a lower closing plate 493 extending rightward from the lower side of the connecting plate 491. It comprises so that it may provide and the starting winning a prize mouth 402 is also made into a corresponding shape.

  Furthermore, in addition to the re-entry path (first entry path 494) located on the back side of the start-up winning shutter 405, a re-entry path (second entry path 495) is formed on the front side of the start-up prize shutter 405. When the gaming ball is guided from the guide stand 407 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 when the starting winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball falls on the upper blocking plate 492 of the starting winning shutter 405. And enter the first inrush passage 494 through the introduction passage 412. The gaming ball having passed through the first rush path 494 jumps out to a position above the start winning hole 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the upper closing plate 492 of the start winning shutter 405. If the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position also at this timing, the gaming ball traverses the upper closing plate 492 forward and enters the second rush path 495. The gaming ball having passed through the second rush path 495 jumps out to a position above the start winning hole 402, more specifically, to a position corresponding to the lower closing plate 493 of the start winning shutter 405. When the start winning shutter 405 is opened at this timing, the gaming ball wins the starting winning opening 402, and when the start winning shutter 405 is in the closed position, the gaming ball is the upper surface of the lower closing plate 493. And is discharged from the discharge opening 411.

  In addition, since the second start winning device 33b according to this embodiment does not fit in the space between the game board 30 and the glass frame unit 137, the game board 30 is scraped to arrange the introduction path 412 further rearward, In the table 407, the game balls are configured to be ejected obliquely backward.

  (C) In the first embodiment, at least one of the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414 may be provided with propulsive force application means for applying a propulsive force to the game ball. For example, a roller in which the upper part is exposed from the lower surface of the introduction path 412 and a motor for rotating the roller may be provided. Also, for example, moving means such as a belt conveyor may be installed in the introduction path 412 and the re-entry path 414.

  In addition, in order to return the gaming ball which has passed through the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 in the closed position above the starting winning opening 402 to the upper position of the starting winning opening 402 again, the introducing path 412 It is necessary to incline upward in the direction of the separation, and the gaming ball runs up the introduction path 412.

  (D) A buffer for reducing the impact when the game ball is received against, for example, the upper surface of the start winning shutter 405 of the first embodiment or the opening peripheral edge of the start winning opening 402 receiving the lower surface of the start winning shutter 405 A material (rubber, relatively soft thermoplastic elastomer, etc.) may be installed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage or collision noise. The buffer material can also be applied to the special winning shutter 434 of the second embodiment and the start winning shutter 405 of the third embodiment.

  (E) In the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b is embodied by moving the game ball to the winning opening immediately for a predetermined time while being able to win, but the second variable winning device 32b It is also possible to apply such a structure to the starting ball entry means used for the predetermined lottery of the second starting winning device 33b etc. In this case, more game balls can be focused on the starting ball entry means in a short-term intensive manner without increasing the opening time, and the winning balls awarded when entering the ball entry means are reduced Even if the number of balls entering the starting ball entering means increases (the ball entering ratio to the total number of shots increases), it is possible to prevent or suppress that the speed of decreasing the holding balls becomes too fast. Furthermore, the increase in the number of balls entering the starting ball entry means increases the chances of lottery and can increase the number of lotterys and can improve the interest by increasing the chance of presentation. In addition, it can also create new playability.

  (F) In the second embodiment, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is configured to slide back and forth, but the present invention is not particularly limited to this configuration, and sliding up and down It may be configured to open and close the big winning opening that opens in the front and back, or may be configured to be rotatable. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the gaming ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b in the closed state is mounted on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 and near the right end that is one longitudinal end side of the big winning shutter 434 Although it is configured to move from the part to the left end that is the other end side in the longitudinal direction, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and the big winning opening is immediately when the big winning shutter 434 is opened It is sufficient if the gaming ball can be moved as long as possible in a state where it can enter 432.

  For example, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured as shown in FIG. That is, the big winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b of FIG. And is configured to be pivotable about an axial direction extending leftward and rightward along the upper edge when in the closed position. In addition, the game receiving member 801 is provided to receive the game ball that has reached the second variable winning device 32b when the big winning shutter 434 is in the closed position. The receiving member 801 includes a receiving plate 802 extending forward from the lower edge of the large winning opening 432 and a front plate 803 extending upward from the front edge of the receiving plate 802, and integrally formed of a transparent resin material. ing.

  At least the upper surface (receiving surface) of the receiving plate 802 is slightly inclined downward to the left (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 58), and is further inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the gaming ball received by the receiving member 801 is moved leftward on the receiving member 801 while maintaining a state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the rear big winning shutter 434. Then, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, the game ball leaning on the big winning shutter 434 while moving the receiving member 801 tilts backward since the big winning shutter 434 is not supported. It will be guided to the backing plate 802 and will enter the large winning opening 432 on the back side. It should be noted that although the gaming ball is received by the receiving member 801, if the big winning shutter 434 is not opened before the gaming ball reaches the left end of the receiving member 801, it is discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device 32b. Ru.

  As described above, even when the second variable winning device 32b is configured, the second winning device can be immediately opened if the second variable winning device 32b is in an open state, such as the game ball leaning against the large winning opening shutter 434. The game ball can be moved along the longitudinal direction of the big winning opening shutter 434 while entering the ball, so that the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b can be increased. Basically, the same effect is exhibited.

  (G) In the second embodiment, the game ball on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is moved from the vicinity of one end in the left-right direction which is the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 toward the other end. Thus, the time for which the big winning shutter 434 is placed is made as long as possible, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is The upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 may be configured to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434.

  For example, in the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 56, by appropriately forming a plurality of convex portions on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, an entering opportunity to meander the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434. A guide groove 811 as an application means is provided. In the present embodiment, the gaming ball entering the second variable winning device 32 b is the top of the guiding groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 by a game member such as a game nail arranged upstream of the second variable winning device 32 b. It is configured to be guided to the right end vicinity portion 812 (which is wider than the other portions) which is the upstream position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), of the mounting plate 431 for attaching the second variable winning device 32 b to the game board 30, a portion above the housing opening 408 where the big winning shutter 434 appears and retracts (hereinafter, The front surface of the upper base portion 813 is inclined rearward and upward. The lower end portion (upper edge portion of the accommodation opening 408) of the upper base portion 813 is positioned below the central portion of the game ball moving on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and When the game ball moving to moves backward, the upper base portion 813 abuts on a portion below the center of the game ball. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the gaming ball on the big winning shutter 434 is caught on the step that defines the front edge of the guide groove 811. Even if it moves backward and is pressed to the upper base portion 813 side, the gaming ball is guided by the front surface of the upper base portion 813 and displaced upward while relative to the step defining the front edge portion of the guide groove 811 In order to enter the special winning opening 432.

  As described above, the guide groove 811 meandering on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is formed, and while the game ball placed on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 meanders, the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434 is By moving the long distance, when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state where the gaming ball can enter the big winning opening 432 for a longer time. Therefore, during a period in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened a plurality of times, the game ball is reached at such a timing that the second variable winning device 32b is reached when the second variable winning device 32b is in the closed state. Even if the game is hit, the gaming ball moves as far as it can enter the second variable winning device 32b as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, but stays within the range as much as possible. It is possible to wait for the second variable winning device 32b to be opened next time. As a result, the operation and effect of the second embodiment, such as increasing the possibility of entering the ball into the second variable winning device 32b, can be more reliably exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is meandered in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434 long in the left and right of the big winning shutter 434 A distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the winning combination shutter 434 is moved toward the longitudinal direction downstream side. Generally, the width before and after the gaming area defined by the gaming board 30 and the transparent glass unit 137 disposed in front thereof is smaller than twice the diameter (about 11 mm) of the gaming ball. Therefore, while meandering the gaming ball on the top surface of the big winning shutter in a direction intersecting the short direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter, or the center side of the substantially circular big winning shutter If you try to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter while turning from the to the outer circumference side, it is necessary to make the front and rear width of the big winning shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area, There is a possibility that it is obliged to select a point behind the front of the game board 30 as a suitable starting point of the game ball moving on the big winning shutter. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this respect, if the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is only meandered in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular big winning shutter 434, the front and rear width of the big winning shutter 434 is Even if it is not wider than the front and rear width of the game area, the gaming ball on the big winning shutter 434 can be moved a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the big winning shutter 434. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Further, for example, instead of forming the concavo-convex on the big winning shutter 434, form a protrusion protruding inward from the peripheral edge of the big winning opening 432 above the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position. It may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 is guided by the protrusion and moved while meandering, in which case the big winning shutter Even if the 434 is displaced to the open position, the projection remains in the state of being projected to the inner peripheral side from the opening peripheral portion of the large winning opening 432. For this reason, there is a risk that the ease of entering the game ball into the big winning opening 432 may be reduced, so by forming the guide groove 811 directly on the big winning shutter 434 as in the example of the above embodiment, If the special winning shutter 434 is displaced to the open position, the whole of the guide groove 811 naturally exits the game area, so that such a problem can be eliminated.

  Furthermore, the front surface of the upper base portion 813 of the mounting plate 431 that may come into contact with the game ball resting on the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is inclined rearward and upward, and the big winning shutter The upper base portion 813 is held on the upper base portion 813 even if the game ball placed on the 434 is caught on the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 of the big winning shutter 434 moving to the open position to the rear. It can be displaced upward as it rides on, and can smoothly ride over the winning combination shutter 434 (step of the guide groove 811) relatively smoothly. Therefore, when the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position is displaced to the rear open position, the big winning shutter 434 rests between the step defining the front edge of the guide groove 811 and the upper base portion 813. It is possible to avoid the situation where the game ball is pressed and pressed in such a way as to be pinched, and the game ball is flung out due to the force. Therefore, the game ball on the big prize shutter 434 can be made to enter the big prize hole 432 more reliably when the big prize shutter 434 is in the open position, and damage to the second variable prize device 32b etc. It can be suppressed.

  Incidentally, as a modification of the configuration to move the predetermined distance in a state where it can enter the big winning opening 432 immediately as long as the big winning shutter 434 opens, for example, as shown in FIG. A small protrusion 805 may be provided on the top surface of the plate 802 as a means for giving a chance to enter the ball. By the presence of the small projections 805, the moving speed of the gaming ball moving the receiving member 801 is suppressed. Therefore, as soon as the second variable winning device 32b is opened, the gaming ball is allowed to stay as long as possible at a position where it can enter the big winning opening 432 as much as possible, and the possibility of entering the second variable winning device 32b It is possible to further enhance the effect.

  Furthermore, for example, the upper surface of the big winning shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape having a low center and high left and right, and the gaming ball placed on the big winning shutter reciprocates to the left and right, and the momentum is weakened It may be configured to fall. In the case of adopting the configuration (a configuration in which the game ball is reciprocated to the left and right on the big winning shutter corresponds to the ball entering opportunity giving means), the game ball rolling on the big winning shutter is greatly prized A hole or a hole is formed in the game board 30 so that the game ball can be second-changed before and after the big winning shutter, since it must not be discharged from the shutter forward or backward and discharged to the outside of the second variable winning device It is necessary to form a passage for discharging to the outside of the winning device.

  In addition, for example, a big winning shutter that can be displaced between a closed position closing the big winning opening 432 opening forward and an open position shifting downward from below the closed position and opening the big winning opening 432. 434, displacement between an appearance position which appears upward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 of the receiving member 801 to form the guide groove 811 on the receiving plate 802, and an embedded position which retreats downward from the upper surface of the receiving plate 802 A possible guiding member may be provided, and the guiding member may be interlocked in such a manner that the guiding member is also in the immersive position when the big winning shutter 434 is in the open position.

  (H) Also, in the second embodiment, the shape of the winning combination shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited. For example, while having a rotary shaft extending left and right and a plurality of blade type opening and closing plates extending in the centrifugal direction from the rotating shaft, the large winning opening is closed with the blade type opening and closing plate, and the rotary shaft rotates to put the game ball on The game ball mounted thereon may be configured to win a prize winning opening 432 by the downward movement of the wing type opening and closing plate.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the start winning shutter 405 of the second variable winning device 32 b is in the open position, all of the gaming balls placed on the big winning shutter 434 enter the big winning opening 432. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and at least the possibility of ball entry may be increased. For example, the big winning shutter 434 may be extended to the upper right by protruding from the big winning opening 432 upstream. Further, instead of extending the big winning shutter 434, a start stand such as the reception stand 479 of the fourth embodiment as the rectifying means is provided adjacent to the upper end of the big winning shutter 434 in the closed position. The game ball may be guided to the side of the large winning opening 432 after the game ball is passed (falled) to the start stand. In this case, it is possible to suppress variations in the speed, angle, and the like of the gaming ball entering the big winning opening 432 side, and it is possible to further suppress damage to the big winning shutter 434. The starting stand may be configured to be more resistant to shock than the big winning shutter 434 (provided with means for relieving shock or high in its own strength), or may be configured to be removable. It may be possible.

  (I) Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, the second variable winning device 32b may be configured. That is, the special winning shutter 434 of the second variable winning device 32b shown in FIG. 57 displaces back and forth between the closed position closing the large winning opening 432 opened upward and the open position opening the large winning opening 432. It is juxtaposed with a possible first shutter 821 and a distance above the diameter of the gaming ball from the first shutter 821 above the first shutter 821 and is located above the special winning opening 432 with the first shutter 821 therebetween. A second shutter 822 is displaceable back and forth between a closed position and an open position exiting from above the large winning opening 432. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are simultaneously configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position, and in the present embodiment, both are integrally formed.

  The second shutter 822 is slightly inclined downward to the left. Further, the first shutter 821 is slightly inclined downward to the right. Furthermore, the first shutter 821 is wider than the second shutter 822, and the left end is positioned more to the left than the diameter of the gaming ball than the left end of the second shutter 822, and A stopper 823 is formed to project upward from the left end. Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball entering the second variable winning device 32b is located on the upstream side of the second shutter 822 by a game member such as a game nail disposed upstream of the second variable winning device 32b. It is comprised so that it may be guided to the site | part near the right end which is a position.

  The gaming ball dropped to the second shutter 822 in the closed position moves leftward on the second shutter 822 and falls from the left end, but the gaming ball is in the closed position. It lands in the vicinity of the left end portion of the one shutter 821, and then moves to the right above the first shutter 821. In addition, when the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the closed position are displaced to the open position, almost all the game balls placed on the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 are in the winning opening 432. It will hit the ball. The game ball having moved on the first shutter 821 to the right end of the first shutter 821 is discharged from the second variable winning device 32b to the outside.

  When adopting the configuration as described above, the position and speed of the gaming ball falling (entering) into the first shutter 821 can be limited to a certain extent by the second shutter 822, and the movement of the gaming ball on the first shutter 821 It can be suitable. The first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 move to the open position not only for the game balls on the first shutter 821 in the closed position but also for the game balls on the second shutter 822 in the closed position. By entering the large winning opening 432, the same effect as that of the second embodiment, in which the game ball is made to enter the large winning opening 432 efficiently, is more reliably exhibited. .

  In the above embodiment, the game nail may be installed at a position directly below the second shutter 822. However, when the second shutter 822 in the closed position is in the open position, the game ball placed on the second shutter 822 can enter the special winning opening 432 when the game nail is in the closed position. In addition, it is arranged so as not to impede the movement of the game ball moving on the first shutter 821 in the closed position. When adopting such a configuration, with the first shutter 821 and the second shutter 822 in the open position, there is no contact with a game member such as a game nail from the upper position than the second shutter 822. When the game ball jumps directly from a relatively high position with respect to the special winning opening 432, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the impact when receiving the game ball becomes relatively large. In addition, the game nail may be configured to support the lower surface of the second shutter 822.

  (J) In the second embodiment, the gaming ball is guided (falling) from the upper left position toward the lower right from the upper left position on the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434 inclined to the lower left by the game nail or character or the like. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the gaming ball is dropped in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the upper surface of the big winning shutter 434, and the (first) speed of the gaming ball moving on the big winning shutter 434 can be made as slow as possible.

  (K) In the third embodiment, the installation position of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459) is not particularly limited, and there is no fundamental problem if it is on the upstream side of the start winning opening 402. However, if the distance between the switching plate 451 and the start winning opening 402 changes, the timing of switching between the open state and the closed state of the switching plate 451 also changes, of course. For example, it is necessary to make a corresponding design based on simulation and the like.

  (L) In the third embodiment, synchronization means may be provided to synchronize the opening / closing timing of the start winning shutter 405 with the operation timing of the switching plate 451 (switching plate 459). The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlock mechanism that interlocks mechanically, or may be control means that opens and operates with the same opening / operating timing and opening / operating conditions. The control unit may be a control unit that measures the opening timing of the start winning shutter 405 and adjusts the timing.

  (M) It is also possible to appropriately combine and use the second start winning device 33b of the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 32b of the second embodiment, and the second start winning device 33b of the third embodiment. It is possible.

  (O) In the fourth embodiment, the shape of the second start winning device 33b is not particularly limited. The game ball may be configured to flow from left to right. In addition, the communication path 477 may also be configured to, for example, flow down while rotating the gaming ball.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the first start winning opening 472 and the second start winning opening 473 exist in the second start winning device 33b, but for example, one start winning opening whose entrance is wide from side to side There is one start winning switch 224b for detecting ball entry, and the game ball is configured to be enterable at the right end and the left end of the entrance, the middle position is closed by the communication passage 477, and the ball is enterable. Each unit may be configured to be openable and closable by a shutter. The number of starting winning openings provided in the second starting winning device 33b may be three or more.

  (P) In the fourth embodiment, the benefit is the same regardless of which of the first starting winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473 of the second starting winning device 33b enters the game ball But may be configured differently. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, even if the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, it is discharged from the second start winning device 33b without winning in any of the start winning openings 472 and 473. If there is a possibility that the second start winning opening 473, which has a possibility of winning at a later timing, will win more than the first starting winning opening 472. You may comprise so that it may be provided. As a benefit, for example, there are a large number of gaming balls paid out based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b, detection of the start winning switch 224b, which has a high probability of winning in the lottery based on the detection of the start winning switch 224b Distribution of jackpot type at the time of winning in the success or failure lottery performed on the basis of the game is advantageous to the player, there are a plurality of start winning switch 224b to detect the gaming ball that has won in the second start winning opening 472 There is a plurality of start-up winning switches 224b and a through gate switch 225 for detecting gaming balls that have won in the second start-up winning opening 472 (a plurality of variable symbols of special symbols and ordinary symbols are suspended). Etc.). The game ball can only reach the second start winning hole 473 when the first start winning hole 472 is closed by the first shutter 474, and the game ball passes the first shutter 474, Since the second shutter 475 is not opened before passing the second shutter 475, it is not possible to enter the ball, so a benefit is awarded based on entering the first start winning opening 472 and the second starting winning opening 473. In the case of making the game different, the player who is given the benefit based on entering the second starting winning opening 473 (in terms of difficulty in entering the ball or simply in terms of the fun of appearance) is the player It is desirable to be more advantageous to

  Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, it always wins in any of the start winning openings having a plurality of game balls (or when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b during a predetermined period) If the game ball is configured to always win in any of the start-up winning openings that have a plurality of game balls, the game balls may be able to win at a later timing than the start-up winning openings that have a possibility of winning at later timings. You may be comprised so that the more generous prize may be provided to the prize winning to the start winning prize mouth which has sex. In addition, when there are three or more start winning openings of the second start winning device 33b, it is possible to increase (more) the benefit of winning to the start winning opening at the middle point. In addition, the start winning opening with the larger (more) winning prize is positioned on the front side (in a prominent position) closer to the player than the smaller (lower) starting winning opening. Is desirable.

  The configuration of the second startup winning device 33b of the fourth embodiment may be embodied as another object, for example, the second variable winning device 32b. That is, in this case, there are a plurality of large winning openings of the second variable winning device 32b, the shutter for opening and closing each large winning opening, the communication passage connecting the large winning openings, etc. The game balls for which the winning a prize is rejected are to be sequentially guided to the downstream big winning opening. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game ball is guided to another winning opening when entering a predetermined winning opening as in the fourth embodiment does not match the configuration of the starting winning device, Alternatively or additionally, it is possible to apply to a variable winning device.

  (Q) In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a speed reduction means for delaying the passing speed of the gaming ball passing through the communication passage 477 may be provided. For example, install a windmill to push the blade away with the game ball and rotate it, or a roller that rotates in the direction to send the game ball to the opposite side to the passing direction of the game ball (e.g. There is no phase, and the gaming ball entering the communication path 477 may be moved to the downstream side to reach the upper position of the second start winning opening 473).

  (R) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable winning device 32a of various jackpot types, the second variable winning device 32b, etc. are not particularly limited. It can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the winning probability in the success or failure lottery changes, the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high entering state to be granted after the end of the jackpot state The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery for winning when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the lottery for winning when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b are separately performed. The table of is referred to, and the distribution of the jackpot type is configured to change, but may be the same.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, two start winning devices 33a and 33b are provided, in which the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the detection of the entering game ball, and the variable winning is opened in the big hit state or the small hit state. Although two devices 32a and 32b are provided, and one through gate 34 is provided on which the variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the detection of the passing game ball, the number, the arrangement, etc. of these are particularly limited. It is not something but can be set for each model.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is suspended after the variation display (first variation display) based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a which is already suspended. The second variable display is given priority so that the variable display (the second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball is taken earlier than the first variable display in such a manner that the held order is repeated. Although it is comprised so that it may be digested, it may be comprised so that it may be digested according to the held order irrespective of it being a 1st fluctuation | variation display or a 2nd fluctuation | variation display.

  (T) In the above embodiment, after the main processing (see FIG. 9) is performed by the main control unit 261, the normal processing (see FIG. 10) is performed, but the present invention is particularly limited to such a configuration is not. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec. The process performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. As the process of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure There is a configuration that turns on a flag indicating the occurrence of Further, the processing of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt processing as in the above embodiment.

  (U) In the above embodiment, the information as to whether or not the big hit state occurs in the pass / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is overwritten. It is not limited to For example, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs separately from the execution area of the special variation reserve area and each reserve area for the winning random number storage area, or the special variation reserve Aside from the area, a storage area corresponding to an execution area of each special variation reserve area and each reserve area may be provided, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of big hit may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 Alternatively, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is confirmed again whether the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, etc., and processing according to the confirmation processing is performed You may configure it.

  (V) A pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment may be implemented. For example, movable means that can be changed to a specific area where game balls moving in the game area can enter the ball, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball to enter the specific area ( A variable ball entry means having a wing member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and a game ball entering a specific ball entry means Special entering detection means (condition satisfaction detecting means) to be detected, a special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving the game area, and detecting the game ball entering the special starting means Special start detection means and main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is specified ball entering means and non-specific ball entering means A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the The main control means is a small hitting state in which the variable ball entering means is opened one or more times for a first time based on the detection of the special start detecting means, or the variable ball entering means is the first time Whether or not to generate a jackpot state which repeats this a specified number of times, with a predetermined number of game balls entering the open variable winning means, for a second round, until the second time is opened for a longer period of time If you win a small hit in the win lottery, will generate a small hit state, if you win a big hit in the win lottery, and if there is a detection of the specific entering detection means The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state. In addition to pachinko machines, the game is implemented as an arrange ball machine, various types of game machines such as ball ball similar to it, slot machines as rotating game machines, and gaming machines of a type combining slot machines and pachinko machines. You may

[Supplementary note]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state, and the variable display device makes a lottery result The variable display for teaching is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2003-154110).

  In general, in a pachinko machine, the so-called electronic tulip in which the gaming ball changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter. A variable ball entry device called an attacker or the like is provided. Then, when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player.

  Furthermore, although such a variable ball entry device is designed to be opened based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, there are many cases where opening and closing are periodically repeated a plurality of times based on the establishment of one predetermined condition. Therefore, taking advantage of the fact that the opening and closing of the variable ball entry device is periodic, when the variable ball entry device is in the open state, the game ball is fired at such a timing as to reach the variable ball entry device By performing a technical operation to refrain from launching the gaming ball at such a timing as reaching the variable ball entry device when the ball device is in the closed state, the number of gaming balls that do not enter the variable winning means is reduced. , It is possible to increase the total number of game balls to be finally acquired.

  However, there are players who perform such technical operations, players who do not perform such operations, or players who do not perform well, and it is not uncommon for a relatively large difference to occur in the total number of game balls finally acquired. Absent.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing an unfair feeling due to a technology difference between players.

Means A1-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
A game ball entering the specified winning opening is (a certainty) arranged at a specific point on a specific entering route where it passes (closed), making it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the specified winning opening An openable member capable of changing state between the state and the open state capable of entering or facilitating entering the ball;
When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball can not be normally used for the gaming ball (it is not possible to pass the specific point to the specific winning opening side due to the opening and closing member being closed). A game machine characterized by comprising time difference passing opportunity giving means for giving an opportunity to pass the specific point at another (following) timing.

  When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the possibility that the game ball passes the specific point to the specific winning hole side is low (effectively) and the possibility of entering the specific winning hole is low (effectively). On the other hand, according to the means A1-1, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the specific point is passed to the specific winning hole side due to the open / close member being in the closed state. It is possible to give an opportunity to pass a specific point at a timing different from the normal timing (at a timing later than the present timing) for a gaming ball which can not be played. For this reason, even if the game ball is allowed to reach the specific point as it is, the game ball is specified compared to the case where the game ball is brought to the specific point at the timing when the specific point is closed by the opening / closing member. Bringing the game ball to a specific point at a different timing (at a predetermined time later than now) by increasing the possibility that the opening and closing member is in the open state by reaching the point. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball passes the specific point to the specific winning hole side and enters the specific winning hole. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the specific points and entering the specific winning opening and the specific points are reached, but the opening / closing member is restricted It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Progress slightly (if you want to make it into the electric chew, you can raise the tempo of the change display, and do not lose the hold of the change display, and if you make it to the attacker, make the round progress smoothly Can).

  Also, in general, when the opening and closing member is in the open state, the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the specific point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball is reached to the specific point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from the launch of. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at a timing to reach a specific point when the open / close member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specific winning opening. Even if the game balls are kept firing, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

Means A1-2. And opening and closing lottery means for performing an opening and closing lottery on whether the opening and closing member is to be opened based on a predetermined opportunity,
The means A1-1 is characterized in that there is a first state that is won with the first probability in the opening and closing lottery, and a second state that is won with the second probability that is higher than the first probability in the opening and closing lottery The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A1-2, the second winning state in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently and the first state in which the opening and closing member is not opened very much allow the player to play the game by aiming at the specific winning opening. It is possible to create a state in which a ball can be hit and the game can be progressed with ease, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is hit and aimed at the specific winning combination opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, to add tonation to the game state, and to improve the playability.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched to aim at the specific winning combination may be configured to enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely. In particular, it was fired in the case of composition that one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering a specific winning opening (as a part of the correction of the difference by the above-mentioned technical operation) If the game ball does not enter the specified winning opening (as it is in a situation where it does not basically enter the other winning opening), the game ball on hand will surely decrease, but in the second state In the case where almost all of the launched game balls enter the specific winning opening, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when entering the specified winning combination, the number of payout game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not reduced as much as possible.

  Means A1-3. The gaming machine according to the means A1-1 or A1-2, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the specific point (opening and closing member).

  According to the means A1-3, by providing the flow straightening means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball before reaching the specific point, the irregular regarding the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball entering the specific point It can be reduced. Therefore, when the opening / closing member is closed by the time difference passing opportunity giving means, an opportunity to bring the gaming ball to a specific point at another timing is given to improve the probability of entering the specific winning opening. The effect can be made even more secure. Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means A1-4. The opening and closing member includes a shutter that can slide in the front and rear direction,
The open / close member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the open / close member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position withdrawn from the game area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1-1 to A1-3, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means A1-4, by sliding the shutter in the front-rear direction, the game ball can be made to enter the specified winning opening by the falling motion, and smooth entering of the specified winning opening can be achieved. Can be realized. In addition, for example, when opening the specific winning a prize opening by rotating the shutter extending forward and backward, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning a prize mouth is thrown up to the outside by the shutter. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the specified winning opening is opened by pivoting the shutter extending forward and backward downward, a large amount of gaming balls fall on the shutter at one time and the shutter is opened even though it is not the opening timing. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the specific winning opening.

  Also, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, but like the present means, By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. Alternatively, “a buffer may be provided on the shutter or a member that is supported in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball and to suppress the damage and the collision sound.

  Means A2-1. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is an introduction path along which the game ball whose passage of the specific point to the specific winning opening side is restricted by the open / close member in the closed state (although the specific point is reached) is guided. And the re-entry path for guiding the gaming ball having entered the introduction path to the specific point, the gaming machine according to the means A1.

  According to the means A2-1, although the gaming ball has reached the specific point, the opening / closing member is not yet in the open state, so the game ball is said to go to the specific point again after killing a little time A series of actions of can be derived. That is, the opening and closing member is in the closed state when the gaming ball first reaches the specific point, but at the timing when the gaming ball reaches the specific point again after a predetermined time via the time difference passing opportunity giving means, the opening and closing member May have been opened. Therefore, even if the attempt to pass the first specific point fails, the same gaming ball can access the specific point multiple times so that you can try again later, so as to enter the specific winning opening The above-described operation and effect of ensuring that the game balls launched into the game area are efficiently entered into the specified winning combination are exhibited. As a matter of course, if the opening / closing member is in the open state when the gaming ball first reaches the specific point, the gaming ball will pass the specific point and enter the specific winning hole at that stage. .

  Means A2-2. The gaming machine according to the means A2-1, wherein the gaming ball having reached the specific point is guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member in a closed state.

  According to the means A2-2, since the game ball can be guided to the introduction path by the opening / closing member when the opening / closing member for opening / closing the route to the specific winning opening is closed, the game ball is guided to the introduction path There is no need to separately provide a movable member for the purpose, and simplification of the configuration, suppression of enlargement, and suppression of cost increase can be achieved. In this means, the opening and closing member in the closed state constitutes a part of the time difference passing opportunity giving means for the gaming ball.

  "The opening and closing member is provided with a shutter that can slide in the front and rear direction, and the opening and closing member is closed by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the shutter exits from the game area The opening and closing member may be in the open state by being displaced to the open position. In this case, the game ball can be made to enter the specific winning opening by the falling motion of the game ball, and the game ball can be reliably guided by the upper surface of the shutter in the closed position.

  Means A2-3. The re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point through the introduction path and the re-entry path to the specific point again does not intersect at least other than the specific point. The gaming machine according to the means A2-1 or A2-2.

  Means A2-3. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game balls collide with each other in the middle of the re-entry route. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably guide the game ball moving on the re-entry route to a specific point at an initial timing. In addition, even if the game balls collide with each other at the specific point, if the open / close member is in the open state, the specific point will pass to the specific winning hole side as it is.

Means A2-4. Normal starting means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving through the game area, or to be capable of entering a ball;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the winning support lottery is won with a first probability and a second state in which the winning support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the variable winning means is opened by being won by the success / fall lottery, the first state is set for the support lottery,
In the gaming area, the gaming machine according to the means A2-1 to A2-3, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means.

  According to the means A2-4, in the state where the variable winning means is opened by winning the success or failure lottery, the first gaming state is set for the support lottery, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most game balls come through the introduction route and the re-entry route. On the other hand, for example, when the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the approach of the game ball to the variable winning means is delayed because the gaming ball passes through the introduction path and the re-entry path. In particular, in the re-entry route of the game ball from the specific point, through the introduction path and the re-entry path to the specific point again, even if the re-entry route crosses even on the specific point, the gaming ball The game balls may not easily enter the ball by the variable winning means, for example, due to contact with each other and the residence time in the special starting means becoming longer. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball in the variable winning means. Furthermore, in a state where the variable winning means is in the open state, the load on the opening and closing member is reduced by reducing the number of gaming balls entering the special starting means (the entry to the specific winning opening is prevented by the opening and closing member). It can be reduced.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the gaming ball enters the ball in the variable winning means on the upstream side, and the game ball flows to the special starting means side It is not necessary for the player to visually recognize an aspect in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes bad.

Means A3-1. The opening and closing member is provided with a shutter that can be displaced between a closed position where the game ball can not enter the specific winning opening and an open position where the ball can enter.
When the shutter is in the closed position, the gaming ball whose entry into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter moves along the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. And
The shutter constitutes the time difference passing opportunity giving means.
The gaming machine according to the means A1, characterized in that when the shutter is in the open position, a gaming ball in contact with the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening.

  According to the means A3-1, when the open / close member is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the specific point is restricted from entering the specific winning opening by the shutter, but the contact with the shutter is as it is It will move along the longitudinal direction of a shutter, maintaining a state. Then, when the opening / closing member is opened, that is, when the shutter is opened, the gaming ball which has been in contact with the shutter (is leaning or resting) passes through the specific point and is identified. You will enter the winning opening. In this way, by making the staying time of the game ball at a specific point as long as possible, the open / close member can enter the specific winning opening if the open / close member is open, and wait for the timing when the open / close member will be opened next Can. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect of efficiently entering the specified winning combination with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified combination opening can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, even if the opening time of the opening and closing member is relatively short, the game ball that is leaning (for example, mounted) on the shutter can be made to enter the specific winning opening. That is, for example, when the shutter is closed, the gaming ball can be placed on the shutter, and all of them can be made to enter the specified winning opening with the short opening of the shutter. Therefore, a predetermined plurality of game balls can be intensively entered without lengthening the total opening time of the opening and closing member. Therefore, when the specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are embodied as an attacker who is opened in the special gaming state by winning in the lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between the rounds are round The attacker will enter the ball with the start, and time efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time, when it is embodied in the electric chew that is released when it is won in the entry support state by winning in the entry support lottery. It can be realized, and this can create new playability.

Means A3-2. The shutter (which is configured to be slidable back and forth) extends in the back and forth direction at the closed position, and the longitudinal direction is the left and right direction,
When the shutter is in the open position, the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening, and the game according to the means A3-1 characterized in that Machine.

  According to the means A3-2, the shutter in the closed position closing the specific winning opening extends forward and backward, and when the shutter is in the open position, the gaming ball having lost the support of the shutter falls downward. It is supposed to enter the special winning opening at. For this reason, for example, the shutter extends vertically and moves the gaming ball backward, so that the action and reaction of the gaming ball until the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening is quicker than entering the specific winning opening by moving the gaming ball backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to relatively quickly enter the specified winning opening with the gaming ball whose entry to the specified winning opening has been restricted by the shutter.

  Means A3-3. The gaming machine according to the means A3-1 or A3-2 comprising: a rectifying means for guiding the gaming ball to an upstream portion of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-3, by reliably guiding the gaming ball to the upstream side with respect to the shutter, the state in which the gaming ball is in contact with the shutter (shutter-like state) is made as long as possible. The action and effect will be more reliably exerted.

  Means A3-4. A gaming machine according to any one of means A3-1 to A3-2 characterized by having drop-off preventing means for maintaining a state where the gaming ball is in contact with the shutter.

  According to the means A3-4, it is possible to suppress the game ball from falling off the upper surface of the shutter.

  Means A3-5. The gaming machine according to any one of the means A3-1 to A3-4, wherein small irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter.

  According to the means A3-5, when the open / close member is in the open position, it is possible to keep the state in which the player can enter the specified winning opening as long as possible.

Means A3-6. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are adapted to the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A3-1 to A3-5, wherein the variable winning means is disposed downstream of the special starting means in the game area.

  As in the above means A3-1, the shutter of the open / close member in the closed state needs to support the gaming ball (in particular, it supports the lower surface side of the gaming ball when the shutter extends back and forth), There is a large burden on receiving game balls that have fallen. In this respect, as in the present means A3-6, by arranging the variable winning means on the downstream side of the special starting means, the number of gaming balls moved toward the variable winning means by the amount of entering the special starting means As a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means A4-1. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is installed upstream of the specific point in the specific entering route,
When the opening / closing member is in the open state or in a state corresponding to the open state, the game ball reaches the specific point after a first time period since it reaches the time difference passing opportunity giving means. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is opened,
When the opening / closing member is in the closed state or in a state corresponding to the closed state, the time difference passing opportunity giving means is closed and the closed state causes the time difference passing opportunity giving means to play a game. The gaming machine according to the means A1, which is configured to reach the specific point after a second time which is longer than the first time has elapsed since the ball reached the time difference passing opportunity giving means.

  When the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the opening and closing member in the closed state prevents the game ball reaching the time difference passing opportunity giving means from flowing into the specific point as it is and enters the specified winning hole. I can not In such a case, according to the means A4-1, the opening / closing member is closed as much as possible by delaying the timing at which the gaming ball reaches the specific point, instead of causing the gaming ball to reach the specific point at a normal timing. When not in the state, that is, when the open / close member is in the open state, the gaming ball can be configured to reach a specific point. Therefore, the above-described operation and effect of efficiently entering the specified winning combination with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified combination opening can be reliably achieved.

  The time until the game ball reaches the specific point from the time difference passing opportunity giving means changes depending on the distance between the specific point and the time difference passing opportunity giving means. Therefore, for example, when the opening / closing member is in the open state, it is possible to pass the specific point by bringing the gaming ball to the specific point as it is with the time difference passing opportunity giving means open. It can not generally be said that it becomes correspondence. For that reason, "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to the open state" and "when the opening / closing member is in a state substantially corresponding to the closed state" are specific points; In consideration of the distance between the time difference passing opportunity giving means, etc., by the time the game ball located in the time difference passing opportunity giving means reaches a specific point, the open / close member will be in the open state, etc. Based on the simulation of the above, it is intended that the timing and period for setting the time difference passing opportunity giving means in the closed state are set for each model.

  Further, synchronization means may be provided to synchronize the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member with the operation timing of the time difference passing opportunity giving means. The synchronization means may be, for example, an interlock mechanism that interlocks mechanically, or may be control means that opens and operates with the same opening / operating timing and opening / operating conditions. The control unit may be a control unit that measures the opening timing of the opening and closing member and adjusts the timing.

  Means A4-2. The time difference passing opportunity giving means includes a stopper capable of changing the state to a first state for holding the gaming ball and a second state for passing the game ball without holding the game ball. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A4-2, when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball can be parked on the upstream side of the specific point. Therefore, by shifting the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific point, the possibility that the game ball will reach the specific point and pass when the opening / closing member is in the open state can be enhanced.

  Means A4-3. The time difference passing opportunity giving means is provided with a travel distance changing means capable of lengthening or shortening the distance of the route through which the game ball reaches the specific point. The gaming machine according to the means A4-1 .

  According to the means A4-3, it is possible to delay the timing to reach a specific point by rotating the gaming ball more than usual.

Means A4-4. A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery as to whether or not the opening and closing member is in an open state;
And a variable display means for displaying a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery,
While the variable display means is performing variable display, the time difference passing opportunity giving means is closed.
The gaming machine according to any one of the means A4-1 to A4-3, wherein the time difference passing opportunity giving means is opened in a state where the variable display means stops the variable display.

  According to the means A4-4, the game ball is guided to the specific winning hole when the game ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole, and the game ball is likely to be difficult to enter the specific winning hole. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of reaching the specific winning combination (afterward) is shifted.

  The above means A2, A3 and A4 are basically considered to be used alone respectively, but the means A2 is configured downstream of the specific point, and the means A3 is specific point configuration, As the means A4 has a configuration upstream of the specific point, it is possible to divide the situation, and in some cases, it is also possible to use them in combination.

Means B-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
It has an open / close member capable of changing the state between an open state enabling entry of the game ball to the specific winning opening and a closed state disabling entry.
If the opening / closing member is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the first specific point capable of entering the specified winning opening if the opening / closing member is in the open state, the game ball is closed by the opening / closing member A gaming machine characterized by further comprising ball entering opportunity giving means for guiding to a second specified point where the player can enter the specified winning combination if the player is in the open state.

  According to the means B-1, when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, if the opening and closing member is in the open state, the gaming ball has reached the first specific point where the player can enter the specific winning opening Also, the game ball will be guided to the second specified point where the player can enter the specified winning opening if the open / close member is in the open state. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the specified winning combination will be given again to the gaming ball that could not enter the specified winning combination, and the possibility of the game ball entering the specified winning combination is increased. Can. Therefore, among the game balls launched for aiming at entering a specific winning opening, the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specific winning opening and the number of gaming balls not entering the specific winning opening The ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning combination can be increased.

  Also, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing that the opening / closing member is in the closed state, the game ball may enter the specified winning opening, so even if the game ball continues to be fired The generation of useless balls that do not enter the specified winning combination will be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls to be acquired between the player who performs a so-called technical operation such as a strike and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

Means B-2. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
A first specified winning opening through which game balls moving in the game area can enter, and a second specified winning opening;
A game ball entering the first specified winning opening is disposed at a first specified point on a first specified entering route where the game ball will pass (must), and the game entering the first specified winning opening A first opening / closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that makes it possible to enter or facilitate entering a ball;
A game ball entering the second specified winning opening is disposed at a second specified point on a second specified entering route where the game ball will pass (always), and the game entering the second specified winning opening And a second opening / closing member that can change state between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult, and an open state that allows entering or facilitating entering a ball,
When the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, (the first specific point can not be passed to the first specified winning opening side due to the first opening and closing member being in the closed state) 2.) A game machine characterized by comprising a ball entry opportunity giving means for guiding a game ball to the second specified ball entry route.

  When the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the possibility of the game ball passing the first specified point to the first specified winning opening side is low (effectively virtually), and it is expected to enter the first specified winning opening There is little (effectively). On the other hand, according to the means B-1, when the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the first specific point is set to the first specific point because the first opening and closing member is in the closed state. (1) A game ball which can not pass to the specified winning combination side can be guided to a second specified entering route leading to the second specified winning combination. For this reason, an opportunity to try to enter the second specified winning combination will be given to the gaming ball that could not enter the first specified winning combination, and the gaming ball becomes a specified winning combination (first specified winning opening And the possibility of entering the second specified winning combination) can be increased. Therefore, among the game balls launched aiming at entering the specific winning opening, the number of gaming balls passing through the specific points and entering the specific winning opening and the specific points are reached, but the opening / closing member is restricted It is possible to increase the ratio of the number of gaming balls entering the specified winning opening in the ratio of the number of gaming balls excluded to the route that does not enter the specific winning opening. In this way, the game ball launched into the game area to enter the specific winning opening can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, and although it is launched for the specific winning opening, it does not reach into the ball. It is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls as much as possible and prevent a situation where it is necessary to fire many game balls in order to enter a specific winning opening. As a result, the burden on the player can be reduced by reducing the number of game balls required to advance the game, and the game balls are efficiently entered into the specific winning opening, thereby making the game Can be advanced slightly (if it is embodied as electric chew, it is possible to increase the number of rotations of the variable display, and when it is embodied as an attacker, it is possible to smoothly advance the round).

  Also, in general, when the opening and closing member is in the open state, the game ball is fired at the timing to reach the specific point, and when the opening and closing member is in the closed state, the gaming ball is reached to the specific point It is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls that do not enter the specific winning opening by performing a technical operation such as refraining from the launch of. On the other hand, there are players who perform such technical operations and players who do not perform such technical operations, and in the long run, there is a relatively large difference in the total number of game balls to be acquired. Furthermore, in the development of gaming machines, the design is made based on the actual situation in the gaming hall etc., and the ratio between the total number of gaming balls fired and the total number of gaming balls paid out (so-called payout rate) ) Is designed including the part of the player who has performed the technical operation. In particular, the larger the number of players who perform the technical operation, the lower the probability of winning in order to suppress the payout rate from becoming too advantageous to the player, or the various winning openings from which game balls are paid out. There is a tendency to reduce the possibility of balls reaching and entering, and there is a risk that the burden on players who do not perform the above-mentioned technical operations may be further increased. For these reasons, there has been a considerable sense of injustice between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  In this respect, in this means, the game ball enters the second specified winning opening even if the game ball is fired at such a timing as reaching the first specific point when the first opening / closing member is in the closed state. Since there is a possibility, generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning combination (the first specific winning combination and the second specific winning combination) will be suppressed even if the game balls are kept firing. For this reason, it is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who performs the technical operation and the player who does not perform the technical operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the technical gap of players and reduce or eliminate the sense of unfairness with players who do not perform the technical operation (do not know, do not do well or intentionally do not) it can. In addition, it is possible for a player who plays a game while always paying attention even if he or she loses the skill without performing the above-mentioned technical operation, to play the game without being aware of such a thing. You can make the game progress more easily.

  As a matter of course, if the first opening and closing member is in the open state when the gaming ball first reaches the first specific point, the gaming ball passes the first specific point at that stage and the first specific winning combination You will enter the mouth. Further, the timing at which the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are in the open state and the timing at which the first opening / closing member is in the opening state may be simultaneous. Furthermore, the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening have the same role, and, for example, the game player enters either of the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening. The number of game values (prize balls) to be paid out may be the same, and when the predetermined lottery is performed based on entering the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening, the same random number counter and the same The lottery table may be used, and as the special gaming state advantageous to the player, the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening are opened with the lapse of the prescribed time or the prescribed number of balls being the upper limit. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of round periods, which are periods, are provided with a closed interval period, a plurality of rounds, whether entering the first specified winning opening or the second specified winning opening, are rounds Number of balls counted to the upper limit of the period It may be counted. By connecting the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member so as to operate integrally, it is possible to achieve commonality of the driving means for operating these, and separately drive control. As in the case of the above, it is not necessary to perform control to measure the timing of synchronization, etc., and simplification of the configuration and control can be achieved.

Means B-3. And opening and closing lottery means for performing an opening and closing lottery on whether the opening and closing member is to be opened based on a predetermined opportunity,
Means B-1 characterized in that there is a first state to be won at the first probability in the opening and closing lottery, and a second state to be elected at the second probability higher than the first probability in the opening and closing lottery The gaming machine described in B-2.

  According to the means B-3, the game is carried out aiming at the specific winning hole by the existence of the second state in which the opening and closing member is opened relatively frequently and the first state in which the opening and closing member is not opened very much. It is possible to create a state in which a ball can be hit and the game can be progressed with ease, and a state in which the progress of the game does not remain even if the game ball is hit and aimed at the specific winning combination opening. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the launch position of the game ball must be substantially changed, to add tonation to the game state, and to improve the playability.

  In the second state, almost all of the game balls launched to aim at the specific winning combination may be configured to enter the specific winning combination. In this case, the operation and effect of suppressing the technological gap of the player can be achieved more surely. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which one game ball is paid out in response to one game ball entering the specified winning hole, if the launched game ball does not enter the specified winning hole (others Basically, the game balls in hand will definitely decrease, but almost all of the game balls fired in the second state will enter the specified winning hole. In such a configuration, such a situation can be dramatically suppressed. Therefore, when entering the specified winning combination, the number of payout game balls is one, and in the second state, it is possible to more reliably establish the game property that the number of game balls on hand is not reduced as much as possible.

  Means B-4. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-3, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the first specific point.

  According to the means B-4, the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball entering the first specific point by providing the rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and the moving speed of the gaming ball before reaching the first specific point Irregularity with respect to Therefore, when the first opening and closing member is in the closed state, the game ball is sent to the second specified ball entry route by the ball entering opportunity giving means to improve the ball entering probability to the second specified winning hole The action and effect can be made more reliable.

  Note that the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means B-5. The opening and closing member (at least the first opening and closing member corresponding to the means B-2) includes a shutter that can slide in the front-rear direction,
The open / close member is brought into a closed state by displacing the shutter to a closed position projecting into the game area, and the open / close member is brought into an open state by displacing the shutter into an open position withdrawn from the game area,
A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4, comprising a receiving member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter protrudes.

  According to the means B-5, when the shutter slides in the front-rear direction, the game ball can enter the specified winning opening by the falling motion, and for example, the specific winning opening is rotated by the rotating shutter. In the case of closing, it is possible to avoid a situation where the gaming ball thought to have entered the specific winning combination is thrown up to the shutter and thrown out to the outside.

  Also, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter that extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower surface side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, but like the present means, By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. In addition, “a buffer material may be provided at a part of the opening and closing member that contacts the gaming ball and regulates passage of the specific point of the gaming ball”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball.

  Means B-6. The game ball that has reached the first specific point when the opening / closing member is in the closed state is closed to the second point (corresponding to the means B-2, the second specific entry route). The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-5, wherein the gaming machine is guided by the opening and closing member.

  According to the means B-6, when the opening and closing member for opening and closing the first specified point (the first specified entering route to the first specified winning hole) is in the closed state, the game ball can be Since it is possible to guide to the second specific entering route), there is no need to separately provide a movable member for guiding the game ball to the second specific point (the second specific entering route), and the configuration is simplified. And the increase in cost can be suppressed. Further, in this means, the (first) opening / closing member in the closed state constitutes the ball entering opportunity giving means.

  Means B-7. The second specific point (corresponding to the means B-2) is configured to be enterable only when the game ball is guided by the ball entrance opportunity giving means to the second specific sound entering route. A gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-6 characterized in that.

  Although there is a possibility that the game ball which could not enter the (first) specific winning opening at the first specific point may enter the (second) specific winning opening at the second specific point, 2) Since there is no possibility that the game ball that could not enter the specified winning opening enters the (first) specified winning opening at the first specific point, for example, directly via the entering opportunity giving means When the game ball is configured to be able to enter the (second) specific winning combination at the second specific point, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific winning combination is reduced. In this respect, according to the means B-7, first, the player attempts to enter the (first) specified winning combination at the first specified point, and if it is not good, the (second) specified winning at the second specified point The order of entering the mouth can be adhered to, and the effect of improving the possibility of entering the specified winning combination can be achieved more reliably.

Means B-8. Normal starting means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving through the game area, or to be capable of entering a ball;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means or entered the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The specified winning opening and the opening / closing member are applied to the special starting means,
There is a first state in which the winning support lottery is won with a first probability and a second state in which the winning support lottery is won with a second probability higher than the first probability,
In a state in which the variable winning means is opened by being won by the success / fall lottery, the first state is set for the support lottery,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  According to the means B-8, in a state in which the variable winning means is opened by winning the success or failure lottery, the first gaming state is set for the support lottery, and the opening / closing member of the special starting means is almost closed. Most game balls come to be discharged outside the special starting means without passing through the second specified entering route and further entering the second specified winning opening. On the other hand, for example, when the variable winning means is on the downstream side of the special starting means, the game ball is routed through the special starting means (the first specific entering route and the second specific entering route) Approach to the variable winning means of the ball is delayed. In this regard, by arranging the variable winning means on the upstream side of the special starting means, it is possible to smoothly enter the ball in the variable winning means.

  In the state where the variable winning means is in the open state, even if the special starting means is in the first state, the gaming ball enters the ball in the variable winning means on the upstream side, and the game ball flows to the special starting means side It is not necessary for the player to visually recognize an aspect in which a large number of game balls enter the special starting means and the flow becomes bad.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launcher enters the special starting means provided on the game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a hit state, and the variable display device makes a lottery result The variable display for teaching is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2003-154110).

  In addition, in general, in the pachinko machine, the game ball changes state between an open state where the game ball can enter or is easy to enter and a closed state where the game ball can not enter or difficult to enter, and the game ball enters. A variable ball entry device is provided in which a predetermined number of winning balls are given by balling.

  By the way, in the special gaming state in which the variable ball entry device is in the open state, various game members such as game nails and the like are arranged in the game area even if the game ball is kept firing at a constant rhythm. There is a concern that the opening timing of the variable ball entry device and the timing at which the game ball reaches the variable ball entry device do not mesh well, and a situation may occur in which the ball can not be entered easily.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of more efficiently entering a game ball into a variable ball entry device. is there.

Means C-1. A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
The game ball moving in the game area is provided with a variable ball entry device that changes state to an open state in which the ball can or can not enter the ball, and a closed state in which the ball can or can not enter the ball.
The variable ball entry device
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
It has a closed position which makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening, and a shutter which can be displaced between the open position which allows the ball to enter.
A ball entry opportunity giving means for displacing the gaming ball whose entry into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter in a prescribed direction while maintaining the contact state to the shutter when the shutter is in the closed position. Equipped
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the shutter is in the open position, a game ball in contact with the shutter enters the specified winning opening.

  According to the means C-1, when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry device is restricted from winning by the specified winning opening by the shutter, but it is It moves in a specified direction while maintaining the contact state of Then, when the shutter is in the open position and the variable ball entry device is in the open state, almost all of the gaming balls that were in contact with the shutter (which were leaning or resting) were in the specific winning opening. It will hit the ball. In this way, if the variable ball entry device is in the open state, by specifying as long as possible the stay time of the gaming ball at the position (state) where the ball will enter the specific winning opening if the shutter is in the open position While maintaining the state of the gaming ball that can enter the winning opening, it is possible to wait for the timing when the variable ball entry device is next opened. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the specified winning opening with the game ball launched into the game area in order to enter the specified winning opening.

  Furthermore, even if the open time of the variable ball entry device is relatively short, the game ball that is leaning (for example, mounted) on the shutter can be made to enter the specified winning hole. . That is, for example, as long as the game ball is put on the shutter when the shutter is closed, it is possible to cause all of them to enter the specified winning opening with the short opening of the shutter. Therefore, it is possible to intensively enter a predetermined plurality of gaming balls without lengthening the total opening time of the variable ball entry device. Therefore, when the specified winning opening and the opening and closing member are embodied as an attacker who is opened in the special gaming state by winning in the lottery, the game balls accumulated in the shutter during the interval between the rounds are round The attacker will enter the ball with the start, and time efficiency can be improved. In addition, it is possible to enter more game balls without lengthening the opening time, when it is embodied in the electric chew that is released when it is won in the entry support state by winning in the entry support lottery. It can be realized, and this can create new playability.

  Also, in this means, even if the game ball is fired at such a timing that the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the specified winning opening, so the game ball continues to be fired Even in this case, the generation of useless balls that do not enter the specific winning combination is suppressed. Therefore, while the variable ball entry device is in the open state a predetermined number of times (eg, a special gaming state advantageous to the player) while holding the period in which it is in the closed state, so-called technical operations such as socking It is possible to reduce (effectively eliminate) the difference in the game balls acquired between the player who does the game and the player who does not perform the technical operation.

  Means C-2. The ball entry opportunity giving means moves the gaming ball in contact with the shutter in the closed position by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while maintaining the contact state with the shutter. The gaming machine according to the means C-1.

  According to the means C-2, when the shutter is in the open position, it is possible to keep as long as possible a state in which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening. Therefore, even when the variable ball entry device is in the open state a plurality of times, even if the game ball is hit at such a timing that it reaches the variable ball entry device when the variable ball entry device is in the closed state, The gaming ball moves as soon as it can enter the variable ball entry device as soon as the variable ball entry device is in the open state, but stays within the range as much as possible, and the variable ball entry device is then opened. You can wait for the timing to be done. As a result, the above-mentioned effects such as enhancing the possibility of ball entry into the variable ball entry device can be more reliably achieved.

  For example, “the shutter at least in the closed position extends back and forth so that gaming balls can be placed on the top surface thereof, and the entering opportunity giving means places the gaming balls on the top surface of the shutter, On the upper surface of the shutter, for example, a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter may be moved.

  It should be noted that “small unevenness may be formed on the upper surface of the shutter as the ball entering opportunity giving means”. In this case, when the shutter is in the open position, the function and effect of keeping the state of being able to enter the specific winning combination opening as long as possible can be reliably achieved. Further, for example, the upper surface of the shutter is formed in a substantially arc shape having a low center and high left and right, and the game ball placed on the shutter reciprocates to the left and right and drops from the shutter when the force is weakened May be

Means C-3. The shutter is the closed position projecting in the game area and extending in the front-rear direction above the specific winning opening, and an open position in which all or most exit from the game area to open the specific winning opening upward Slideable back and forth between the
When the shutter is in the open position, a game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to enter the specified winning opening, or means C-1 or C- The gaming machine according to 2.

  According to the means C-3, the game ball is placed (stored) on the upper surface of the shutter in the closed state of the variable ball entry device, and the support of the shutter is lost when the variable ball entry device is opened. When the gaming ball falls downward, it enters the specified winning opening. For this reason, for example, the shutter extends vertically and moves the gaming ball backward, so that the action and reaction of the gaming ball until the gaming ball enters the specific winning opening is quicker than entering the specific winning opening by moving the gaming ball backward. Become. Therefore, by setting the shutter in the closed position to the open position, it is possible to win the game winning ball whose entry into the specific winning opening has been restricted by the shutter relatively quickly to the specific winning opening.

  In addition, for example, when opening the specific winning a prize opening by rotating the shutter extending forward and backward, the game ball thought to have entered the specific winning a prize mouth is thrown up to the outside by the shutter. It is possible to avoid such a situation. Furthermore, for example, in the configuration in which the shutter extending longitudinally is pivoted downward to open the specific winning opening, a large number of gaming balls fall on the shutter at one time and the shutter is not at the timing of opening due to weight or impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the specific winning opening by being opened to

  Note that the shutter has a configuration in which the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction, and the ball entering opportunity giving means is configured to place the game ball on the upper surface of the shutter against the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter. It is also possible to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter toward the longitudinal direction downstream side of the shutter while meandering in the cross direction. Generally, the width of the front and back of the game area defined by the game board and the transparent plate disposed in front thereof is smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, while meandering the gaming ball resting on the upper surface of the shutter in a direction intersecting the short direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, or from the center side of the substantially circular shutter to the outer peripheral side If it is necessary to make the front and rear width of the shutter wider than the front and rear width of the game area when trying to move a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter while turning it towards, the game ball moving on the shutter As a suitable starting point, it may be necessary to select a point behind the front of the game board. In this case, the configuration may be complicated. In this respect, if the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is only meandered in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the substantially rectangular shutter, the front and rear width of the shutter is made wider than the front and rear width of the game area Even if not, it is possible to move the gaming ball on the shutter by a distance longer than the width in the longitudinal direction of the shutter. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Means C-4. The gaming machine according to the means C-3, wherein the ball entering opportunity giving means is formed by forming asperities on the upper surface of the shutter.

  For example, instead of forming asperities on the shutter side, the ball entrance opportunity giving means is configured by forming a protrusion that protrudes inward from the opening peripheral edge of the specified winning opening above the shutter in the closed position. When the game ball placed on the upper surface of the shutter is guided by the projection and moved while meandering, the projection is inside the opening periphery of the specific winning opening even if the shutter is displaced to the open position. Since it will remain in the state which protruded on the circumference side, there is a possibility that the ease of entering of the game ball to a specific winning a prize mouth may fall.

  In this respect, as in the present means C-4, when the shutter is displaced to the open position by forming the concavities and convexities forming the ball entering opportunity giving means on the shutter side, the whole or the ball entering opportunity giving means also Such problems can be wiped out because most of them leave the game area.

Means C-5. The variable ball entry device comprises a substantially plate-like base plate attached to the game board,
The base plate is formed with a housing opening for projecting and retracting the shutter.
The upper portion of the housing opening of the front surface of the base plate is inclined rearward and upward.
The gaming machine according to the means C-4, wherein the gaming ball moving on the upper surface of the shutter is configured to be capable of coming into contact with a portion lower than the center of the gaming ball.

  As in the case of the above-mentioned means C-3, in the case where the shutter extends back and forth and is displaceable back and forth, and as in the case of the above-mentioned means C-4, when irregularities are formed on the upper surface of the shutter When pulling the shutter to the game board side to bring it to the open position, there is a concern that the gaming ball placed on the shutter is pressed against the convex part of the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate, and the force will pop off by that force. Ru.

  In this respect, according to the means C-5, when the shutter is in the open position, it is assumed that the gaming ball on the shutter is at a position where it is likely to be pinched by the convex portion on the upper surface of the shutter and the base plate. Also, the game ball is relatively smooth as the game ball rests on the upper part of the accommodation opening of the base plate which is inclined rearward and directed upward and abuts against the part below the central part of the game ball. It is possible to get over the convex part to the specific winning hole side. Therefore, the game ball on the shutter can be more reliably entered into the specified winning opening when the shutter is in the open position, and damage to the variable ball entry device and the like can be suppressed.

  Means C-6. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-5, further comprising a support member capable of supporting the lower surface of the front end portion of the shutter when the shutter is displaced to the closed position. .

  According to the means C-6, a relatively large load is likely to be applied to the shutter which extends in the front-rear direction and receives the lower side of the gaming ball when in the closed position, By providing the member, the load on the root side of the shutter can be reduced, and the situation in which the shutter is broken at the root side can be prevented.

  Note that “a rib may be formed on the back surface side of the shutter”. In this case, the strength of the shutter can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shutter from being damaged when the gaming ball collides with the shutter. Alternatively, “a buffer may be provided on the shutter or a member that is supported in contact with the shutter in the closed position”. In this case, it is possible to reduce the impact when the shutter receives the game ball and to suppress the damage and the collision sound.

Means C-7. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The variable winning device is configured by the variable winning means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is disposed downstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  As in the above means C-3, the shutter in the closed position needs to receive the dropped game ball, and the burden on that time is large. In this respect, as in the present means C-7, by arranging the variable winning means as the variable ball entry device on the downstream side of the special starting means, the variable winning means is directed to the variable winning means by the amount entering the special starting means. The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

Means C-8. Normal start means configured to allow passage of a game ball moving in the game area;
Special start means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Variable winning means capable of changing the state between an open state in which the game ball moving the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter;
Normal start detection means for detecting a game ball which has passed through the normal start means;
Special start detection means for detecting a game ball entering the special start means;
Variable winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the variable winning means;
A support lottery execution unit that performs an entrance support lottery on whether or not the special startup unit is to be opened based on the detection by the normal startup detection unit;
It has a lottery performing means for performing a lottery on whether to make the variable winning means open based on the detection by the special start detecting means,
The variable starting device is constituted by the special starting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-3 to C-6, wherein the variable winning means is disposed upstream of the special starting means in the gaming area.

  The shutter in the closed position needs to receive the dropped game ball, and the burden on that time is large. In this respect, as in the present means C-8, by disposing the special starting means as the variable ball entry device on the downstream side of the variable winning means, the amount of ball entering the variable winning means toward the special starting means The number of moving game balls can be reduced, and as a result, the burden on the shutter can be reduced.

  Means C-9. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 or C-8, further comprising: rectifying means for adjusting the moving direction and moving speed of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the variable ball entry device.

  According to the means C-9, the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball entering the variable ball entry device are provided by providing the rectifying means for adjusting the movement direction and the movement speed of the game ball before reaching the variable ball entry device Irregularity with respect to For this reason, it is possible to suppress the variation in the drop point to the shutter, that is, the start point of the gaming ball moving while being in contact with the shutter. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the variation in the initial speed of the gaming ball moving while in contact with the shutter. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect is achieved that the time for moving the game ball while contacting the shutter is made as long as possible, and the probability of entering the specified winning opening is improved.

  It should be noted that "rectifying means may guide the gaming ball to the upstream side portion of the shutter". Further, the rectifying means may be configured with an accessory, may be configured with a nail arrangement, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

Means C-10. The shutter is
A first shutter that extends back and forth at least in the closed position and can close the specified winning opening;
And a second shutter that extends longitudinally at least in the closed position, and is disposed above the first shutter at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball from the first shutter.
The first shutter and the second shutter are simultaneously configured to be displaceable between the open position and the closed position,
The game ball dropped to the second shutter in the closed position moves on the second shutter, falls to the first shutter in the closed position, and moves on the first shutter.
When the first shutter and the second shutter in the closed position are displaced to the open position, gaming balls on the first shutter and the second shutter enter the specified winning opening A gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-9 characterized in that.

  According to the means C-10, the position and speed of the gaming ball falling to the first shutter can be limited to a certain extent by the second shutter, and movement of the gaming ball on the first shutter can be made suitable. . In addition, the first shutter and the second shutter are displaced to the open position not only for the game ball on the first shutter in the closed position but also for the game balls on the second shutter in the closed position. Since the player enters the specific winning combination, the effect of entering the gaming ball into the specific winning combination efficiently is more reliably exhibited.

  Below, the basic composition of the various game machines to which each said means is applied is shown.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means A ball game machine having a game area in which the game balls are guided and ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) disposed in the game area can be mentioned.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above-described means is a ball game machine having a gaming area extending substantially in the vertical direction. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means Game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, A ball game machine having a variable winning device, an operation opening, etc.) and configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ballistic gaming machines, is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

  10: Pachinko machine, 32a: first variable winning device, 32b: second variable winning device, 33a: first starting winning device, 33b, second starting winning device, 34: through gate, 42: decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R ... 2nd special display device, 46 ... reserve lamp, 223a, 223b ... count switch, 224a, 224b ... start winning switch, 225 ... through gate switch, 261 ... main controller, 262 ... sub Control device.

Claims (1)

A game area in which game balls fired by the launching means are guided;
The game ball moving in the game area is provided with ball entering means which changes state to an opened state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball can not enter the ball,
The ball entering means is
A specific winning opening on which game balls moving in the game area can enter;
The ball entry detection means which detects the game ball which entered the specific winning a prize opening,
It is not possible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening, and it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening with the closed position where the ball entry means is in the closed state, and the ball entry means A shutter capable of being displaced between the open position to be in the open state;
A specific entering route for guiding a game ball moving the game area to the specific winning opening is provided,
The game ball moving in the game area is guided to the entrance of the specific entry route, whereby the game ball is guided to the entry means.
When the ball entry means is in the closed state when the game ball reaches the ball entry means, entry of the game ball into the specified winning opening is restricted by the shutter in the closed position. And the game ball is guided to the exit of the specific entry route,
When the ball entering means is in the open state when the game ball reaches the ball entering means, and in a state where the game ball is restricted from entering the specified winning opening by the shutter When the writing ball means is in the open state, the gaming ball enters the specified winning hole,
When the ball entering means is not in the open state in a state where the game ball is restricted from entering the specified winning opening by the shutter, the game ball is discharged from the exit of the specified entering route. ,
The shutter is
A first guiding portion which enters the entrance of the specific entering route and contacts the gaming ball that has reached the entering means, and guides the gaming ball away from the exit of the specific entering route;
The game ball having passed through the first guiding portion is guided, and a second guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball to the exit of the specific ball entry route,
At least a part of the first induction portion overlaps with the second induction portion.

Images